Register your product and get support at 7303 series www.philips.com/welcome
User Manual 43PUS7303 50PUS7303 55PUS7303 65PUS7303 Contents
1 Setting Up 4 10 TV Menu 42 1.1 Read Safety 4 10.1 About TV Menu 42 1.2 TV Stand and Wall Mounting 4 10.2 Open TV Menu 42 1.3 Tips on Placement 4 1.4 Power Cable 4 11 Sources 43 1.5 Antenna Cable 5 11.1 Switch to a device 43 11.2 Options for a TV Input 43 2 Remote Control 6 11.3 Device Name and Type 43 2.1 Key overview 6 11.4 Rescan Connections 43 2.2 Pair Your Remote Control to TV 7 2.3 Voice search 7 12 Networks 45 2.4 IR Sensor 8 12.1 Network 45 2.5 Batteries 8 12.2 Bluetooth 45 2.6 Cleaning 8 13 Settings 46 3 Switching On and Off 9 13.1 Picture 46 3.1 On or standby 9 13.2 Sound 49 3.2 Keys on TV 9 13.3 Ambilight Settings 51 13.4 Eco Settings 52 4 Channels 10 13.5 General Settings 53 4.1 Watching channels 10 13.6 Clock, Region, and Language Settings 55 4.2 Favourite Channels 12 13.7 Android Settings 56 4.3 Text / Teletext 13 13.8 Universal Access Settings 56 4.4 Interactive TV 14 13.9 Lock Settings 56 5 Channel Installation 16 14 Videos, Photos and Music 58 5.1 Satellite Installation 16 14.1 From a Computer or NAS 58 5.2 Antenna/Cable Installation 19 14.2 Favourites Menu 58 5.3 Channel List Copy 21 14.3 Most Popular Menu and Last Played Menu 58 5.4 Satellite List Copy 22 14.4 From a USB Connection 58 14.5 Play your Videos 58 6 Connect Devices 24 14.6 View your Photos 59 6.1 About Connections 24 14.7 Play your Music 60 6.2 CAM with Smart Card - CI+ 25 6.3 Home Theatre System - HTS 26 15 TV Guide 62 6.4 Smartphones and Tablets 27 15.1 What You Need 62 6.5 Blu-ray Disc Player 27 15.2 TV Guide Data 62 6.6 DVD Player 27 15.3 Using the TV Guide 62 6.7 Bluetooth 27 6.8 Headphones 28 16 Recording and Pause TV 64 6.9 Game Console 28 16.1 Recording 64 6.10 USB Hard Drive 29 16.2 Pause TV 65 6.11 USB Keyboard 30 6.12 USB Flash Drive 31 17 Smartphones and Tablets 67 6.13 Photo Camera 31 17.1 Philips TV Remote App 67 6.14 Camcorder 31 17.2 Google Cast 67 6.15 HDMI 32 17.3 AirPlay 67 6.16 Computer 32 17.4 MHL 67 7 Connect your Android TV 33 18 Games 68 7.1 Network and Internet 33 18.1 What You Need 68 7.2 Google Account 35 18.2 Gamepads 68 7.3 Philips App Gallery 35 18.3 Play a Game 68 8 Apps 37 19 Ambilight 69 8.1 About Apps 37 19.1 Ambilight Style 69 8.2 Google Play 37 19.2 Ambilight Off 69 8.3 App Gallery 38 19.3 Ambilight Settings 69 8.4 Start or Stop an App 38 8.5 Lock Apps 38 20 Top Picks 70 8.6 Manage Apps 40 20.1 About Top Picks 70 8.7 Storage 40 20.2 Now on TV 70 20.3 TV on Demand 70 9 Internet 41 20.4 Video on Demand 71 9.1 Start Internet 41 20.5 Freeview Play 71 9.2 Options on Internet 41 21 Home Menu 72
2 21.1 About the Home Menu 72 21.2 Open the Home Menu 72 21.3 Restricted Profile 72 22 Netflix 73 23 Software 74 23.1 Update Software 74 23.2 Software Version 74 23.3 Automatic Software Update 74 23.4 Open Source Software 75 23.5 Open Source License 75 23.6 Announcements 162 24 Specifications 163 24.1 Environmental 163 24.2 Power 163 24.3 Operating System 163 24.4 Reception 163 24.5 Display Type 163 24.6 Display Input Resolution 164 24.7 Connectivity 164 24.8 Sound 164 24.9 Multimedia 164 25 Help and Support 165 25.1 Register your TV 165 25.2 Using Help 165 25.3 Troubleshooting 165 25.4 Online Help 167 25.5 Support and Repair 167 26 Safety and Care 168 26.1 Safety 168 26.2 Screen Care 169 27 Terms of Use 170 27.1 Terms of Use - TV 170 27.2 Terms of Use - Smart TV 170 27.3 Terms of Use - Philips App Gallery 170 28 Copyrights 171 28.1 MHL 171 28.2 Ultra HD 171 28.3 HDMI 171 28.4 Dolby Audio 171 28.5 DTS Premium Sound ™ 171 28.6 DTS 2.0+Digital Out ™ 171 28.7 Microsoft 171 28.8 Wi-Fi Alliance 172 28.9 Kensington 172 28.10 Other Trademarks 172 29 Disclaimer regarding services and/or software offered by third parties 173 Index 174
3 1 Caution Wall mounting the TV requires special skills and Setting Up should only be performed by qualified personnel. The TV wall mounting should meet safety standards 1.1 according to the TVs weight. Also read the safety Read Safety precautions before positioning the TV. TP Vision Europe B.V. bears no responsibility for Read the safety instructions first before you use the improper mounting or any mounting that results in TV. accident or injury. To read the instructions, in Help, press the colour key Keywords and look up Safety Instructions. 1.3 Tips on Placement 1.2 • Position the TV where light does not shine directly TV Stand and Wall Mounting on the screen. • Dim lighting conditions in the room for best TV Stand Ambilight effect. • Position the TV up to 15 cm away from the wall. You can find the instructions for mounting the TV • The ideal distance to watch TV is 3 times its diagonal stand in the Quick Start Guide that came with the TV. screen size. When seated, your eyes should be level In case you lost this guide, you can download it with the centre of the screen. from www.philips.com. Use the product type number of the TV to look for the Quick Start Guide to download.
Wall Mounting
Your TV is also prepared for a VESA-compliant wall mount bracket (sold separately). 1.4 Use the following VESA code when purchasing the wall mount . . . Power Cable
• Insert the power cable into the POWER connector on the back of the TV. • Make sure the power cable is securely inserted in the connector. • Make sure that the power plug, in the wall socket, is accessible at all times. • When you unplug the power cable, always pull the plug, never pull the cable.
• 43PUS7303 VESA MIS-F 200x200, M6 (min.: 10mm, max.:15mm) • 50PUS7303 VESA MIS-F 200x200, M6 (min.: 10mm, max.:15mm) • 55PUS7303 VESA MIS-F 300x200, M6 (min.: 10mm, max.:15mm) • 65PUS7303 VESA MIS-F 400x200, M6 (min.: 10mm, max.:15mm) Preparation First remove the 4 plastic screw caps out of the threaded bushes on the back of the TV. Make sure that the metal screws, to mount the TV to the VESA-compliant bracket, go about 10mm deep inside the threaded bushes of the TV.
4 Although this TV has a very low standby power consumption, unplug the power cable to save energy if you do not use the TV for a long period of time. For more information, in Help, press the colour key Keywords and look up Switching On for more information on switching the TV on or off.
1.5 Antenna Cable
Insert the antenna plug firmly into the Antenna socket at the back of the TV. You can connect your own antenna or an antenna signal from an antenna distribution system. Use an IEC Coax 75 Ohm RF antenna connector. Use this antenna connection for DVB-T and DVB-C input signals.
5 2 Remote Control
2.1 Key overview
Top
1 - TV Menu To open the TV Menu with typical TV functions. 2 - SOURCES To open or close the Sources menu. 3 - INFO To open or close programme info. 1 - Standby / On 4 - BACK To switch the TV on or back to Standby. • To switch back to the previous channel you 2 - VOICE microphone selected. • To return to previous menu. 3 - LIST To open or close the channel list. 5 - Colour keys Direct selection of options. 4 - AMBILIGHT To select one of the Ambilight style. 6 - EXIT To switch back to watching TV. 5 - TV GUIDE To open or close the TV Guide. 7 - OPTIONS To open or close the options menu. 6 - SETTINGS • To open the quick settings menu. 8 - OK key • To pair the remote control to the TV. To confirm a selection or setting. 9 - Arrow / navigation keys 7 - TOP PICKS To navigate up, down, left or right. To open the menu with recommended programmes, Video on Demand (Rental Videos) or Online TV 10 - HOME (Catch Up TV). To open the Home menu. If available. 8 - VOICE To start speaking your voice search. Bottom
Middle
6 When you started the initial TV installation, the TV invited you to long press the PAIR key, and by doing so, the pairing was done. Note: 1 - Once the remote control has entered pairing mode successfully, the blue LED indicator ring around the microphone on the front side of the remote control starts blinking. 2 - The remote control must be kept close to the TV (within 1m distance) during pairing in order to ensure success. 3 - If the TV does not launch the voice search field when press VOICE, pairing was unsuccessful. 4 - It is advisable to wait until the set has fully started up and launched all background processes before pairing mode is entered as the toast message 1 - containing further instructions may appear too late, To open the Netflix App directly. thereby negatively impacting the pairing procedure. 2 - Volume Pairing or pairing again To adjust the volume level. If the pairing with the remote control was lost, you 3 - Number keys can pair the TV with the remote control again. To select a channel directly. You can simply long press 4 - SUBTITLE the PAIR key (approximate for 3 seconds) for To switch Subtitles on, off or on during mute. pairing. Alternatively, go (TV 5 - Playback and Record menu) > Settings > Wireless and • Play , to playback. network > Remote control > Pair remote control, • Pause , to pause playback then follow the on-screen instructions. • Stop , to stop playback A message appears when the pairing is successful. • Rewind , to rewind • Fast forward , to go fast forward Remote Control Software • Record , to start recording (TV menu) > Settings > Wireless and 6 - Channel network > Remote control > Current software info To switch to the next or previous channel in the channel list. Once the remote control is paired, you can check the To open the next or previous page in Text/Teletext. current remote control software version. (TV menu) > Settings > Wireless and 7 - Mute To mute the sound or to restore it. network > Remote control > Update remote control software 8 - TEXT To open or close Text/Teletext. Check available remote control software for updates.
2.2 2.3 Pair Your Remote Control to Voice search TV You can search for videos, music or anything else on the Internet by simply using your voice. You can This remote control uses both Bluetooth and IR speak into the microphone on the remote control. (infrared) to send its commands to the TV. You need to pair the remote control to the TV before • You can use this remote control via IR (infrared) for use voice search. most operations. To use Voice... • To use advanced operation like voice search and remote control keyboard, you need to pair (link) the 1 - Press and hold VOICE on remote TV with the remote control. control, the blue light on the remote control lights up and the search field opens, the microphone is active.
7 2 - Speak out what you are looking for with clear pronunciation. You can speak for 10 seconds before the microphone switches off. It might take some time for the results to appear. 3 - In the list of search results, you can select the item you want. Set the language you like to use with voice interaction (TV menu) > Settings > Android settings > Preferences > Speech
2.4 IR Sensor
The TV can receive commands from a remote control that uses IR (infrared) to send commands. If you use such a remote control, always make sure you point the remote control at the infrared sensor on the front of the TV.
Warning Do not put any objects in front of IR sensor of the TV, it may block the IR signal.
2.5 Batteries
If the TV does not react on a key press on the remote control, the batteries might be empty. To replace the batteries, open the battery compartment on the keyboard side of the remote control. 1 - Use a small coin or other small, blunt object and press the rectangular shaped release button to open the battery lid. 2 - Replace the old batteries with 2 type AA-LR6-1.5V batteries. Make sure the + and the - ends of the batteries line up correctly. 3 - Reposition the battery door and slide it back until it clicks. • Remove the batteries if you are not using the remote control for a long time. • Safely dispose of your old batteries according to the end of use directions.
2.6 Cleaning
Your remote control is treated with a scratch-resistant coating. To clean the remote control, use a soft damp cloth. Never use substances such as alcohol, chemicals or household cleaners on the remote control.
8 3 To switch off the TV completely, disconnect the power plug. When disconnecting the power plug, always pull the Switching On and power plug, never the cord. Ensure that you have full access to the power plug, power cord and outlet Off socket at all times.
3.1 On or standby 3.2 Keys on TV Make sure the TV is connected to the mains AC power. Connect the supplied power cord to the AC If you lost the remote control or its batteries are in connector at the back of the TV. The indicator light empty, you can still do some basic TV operations. at the bottom of the TV lights up. To open the basic menu… Switch on 1 - With the TV switched on, press the joystick key on Press on the remote control to switch the TV the back of the TV to bring up the basic menu. on. Alternatively, press HOME. You can also 2 - Press left or right to select Volume, press the small joystick key on the back of the TV to Channel or Sources. Select Demo, to start switch the TV on in case you can't find the remote a demo movie. control or its batteries are empty. 3 - Press up or down to adjust the volume or tune to the next or previous channel. Press up or down to go Switch to standby through the list of sources, including the tuner selection. Press the joystick key to start the demo To switch the TV to standby, press on the remote control. You can also press the small joystick key on movie. the back of the TV. 4 - The menu will disappear automatically. To switch the TV on standby, select and press the joystick key.
In standby mode, the TV is still connected to the mains power but consumes very little energy.
9 4 press BACK to close the menu. If you lock or unlock channels in a channel list, you Channels only have to enter the PIN code just once until you close the channel list. 4.1 For more information, in Help, press the colour Watching channels key Keywords and look up Child Lock for more information. Tune to a Channel
To start watching TV channels, press . The TV Parental Rating tunes to the channel you last watched. To prevent children from watching a programme not Switch Channels suitable for their age, you can set an age rating. To switch channels, press or . Digital channels can have their programmes age If you know the channel number, type in the number rated. When the age rating of a programme is equal to with the number keys. Press OK after you entered or higher than the age you have set as age rating for the number to switch immediately. your child, the programme will be locked. To watch a locked programme, you must enter the Parental If the information is available from the Internet, the TV Rating code first. shows the current programme name and details followed by the next programme name and details. To set an age rating…
Previous channel 1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK. 2 - Select Child Lock > Parental Rating and To switch back to the previously tuned channel, press OK. press BACK. 3 - Enter a 4-digit Child lock code. If you did not set You can also tune to channels from a Channel List. a code yet, select Set Code in Child Lock. Enter a 4-digit Child lock code and confirm. Now you can set an age rating. 4 - Back in Parental Rating, select the age and Lock a Channel press OK. 5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close Lock and Unlock a Channel the menu. To prevent children from watching a channel, you can To switch off the parental age rating, select None. lock a channel. To watch a locked channel, you must However, in some countries you must set an age enter the 4 digit Child Lock PIN code first. You rating. cannot lock programmes from connected devices. For some broadcasters/operators, the TV only locks To lock a channel… programmes with a higher rating. The parental age rating is set for all channels. 1 - Press . 2 - Press OK to open the channel list. If necessary change the channel list. 3 - Select the channel you want to lock. Channel Options 4 - Press OPTIONS and select Lock Channel and press OK. Open Options 5 - Enter your 4 digit PIN code if the TV asks for it. A locked channel is marked with a (lock). While watching a channel, you can set some options. 6 - Press (left) to go back one step or Depending on the type of channel you are watching press BACK to close the menu. (analogue or digital) or depending on the TV settings To unlock a channel… you made, some options are available. 1 - Press . To open the options menu… 2 - Press OK to open the channel list. If necessary 1 - While watching a channel, press OPTIONS. change the channel list. 2 - Press OPTIONS again to close. 3 - Select the channel you want to unlock. 4 - Press OPTIONS and select Unlock Channel and press OK. 5 - Enter your 4 digit PIN code if the TV asks for it. 6 - Press (left) to go back one step or
10 Subtitles Select a Subtitle Language
Switch On If none of the preferred subtitle languages are available, you can select another subtitle language if Digital broadcasts can have subtitles for their available. If no subtitle languages are available, you programmes. cannot select this option. To show the subtitles… To select a subtitle language when none of your Press SUBTITLE. preferred languages are available… You can switch subtitles On or Off. Alternatively 1 - Press OPTIONS. you can select Automatic. 2 - Select Subtitle Language and select one of the languages as subtitles temporarily. Automatic If language information is part of the digital broadcast and the broadcasted programme is not in your Audio Language language (the language set on TV), the TV can show subtitles automatically in one of your preferred Preferred Audio Language subtitle languages. One of these subtitle languages A digital broadcast can offer several audio languages must also be part of the broadcast. (spoken languages) for a programme. You can set a You can select your preferred subtitle languages preferred primary and secondary audio language. If in Subtitle Language. audio in one of these languages is available, the TV will switch to the audio language. To set the primary and secondary audio language… Subtitles from Text 1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK. If you tune to an analogue channel, you need to 2 - Select Region and Language and make the subtitles available for each channel select Languages > Primary Audio or Secondary manually. Audio. 3 - Select the language you need and press OK. 1 - Switch to a channel and press TEXT to open 4 - Press (left) to go back one step or Text. press BACK to close the menu. 2 - Enter the page number for subtitles, usually 888. 3 - Press TEXT again, to close Text.
If you select On in the Subtitle menu when watching Select an Audio Language this analogue channel, subtitles will be shown if available. If none of the preferred audio languages are available, you can select another audio language if To know if a channel is analogue or digital, switch to available. If no audio languages are available, you the channel and open Information in OPTIONS. cannot select this option. To select an audio language when none of your Subtitle Language preferred languages are available… 1 - Press OPTIONS. Preferred Subtitle Languages 2 - Select Audio Language and select one of the languages as audio temporarily. A digital broadcast can offer several subtitle languages for a programme. You can set a preferred primary and secondary subtitle language. If subtitles in one of these languages are available, the TV will HbbTV on this Channel show the subtitles you selected. If you want to avoid access to HbbTV pages on a To set the primary and secondary subtitle language… specific channel, you can block the HbbTV pages for this channel only. 1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK. 2 - Select Region and Switch on HbbTV Language > Languages > Primary Subtitles or Secondary Subtitles. (TV menu) > Settings > General 3 - Select the language you need and press OK. settings > Advanced > HbbTV settings > HbbTV 4 - Press (left) to go back one step or > On. press BACK to close the menu.
11 arrows (up) or (down) to select a channel, Information then press OK to watch the selected channel. You You can view the technical characteristics of a only tune to the channels in that list when particular channel, like digital or analogue, sound using or keys. type, etc. To view the technical information on a channel… Create a Favourites List 1 - Tune to the channel. 2 - Press OPTIONS, select Information and To create a favourite channels list… press OK. 3 - To close this screen, press OK. 1 - Press , to switch to TV. 2 - Press OK to open the current channel list. 3 - Press OPTIONS. 4 - Select Create Favourites List and press OK. Mono / Stereo 5 - In the list at the left, select a channel you want as You can switch the sound of an analogue channel to a favourite and press OK. Channels come in the list at Mono or Stereo. the right in the order you add them. To undo, select the channel in the list at the left and To switch to Mono or Stereo… press OK again. 1 - Tune to an analoge channel. 6 - If necessary, you can go on selecting and adding 2 - Press OPTIONS, select Mono/Stereo and channels as favourites. press (right). 7 - To finish adding channels, press BACK. 3 - Select Mono or Stereo and press OK. The TV will ask to rename the Favourites List. You can 4 - Press (left) to go back one step or use the on-screen keyboard. press BACK to close the menu. 1 - Use the on-screen keyboard to delete the current name and enter a new name. 2 - When done, select Close and press OK. Reorder Channels The TV will switch to the newly created Favourites Only in a Favourites List you can change the List. sequence of channels (reorder). You can add a range of channels in one go or start a To change the sequence of channels… Favourites List by duplicating the channel list with all channels and removing the channels you do not 1 - Open the Favourites List you want to reorder. want. 2 - Press OPTIONS, select Reorder Channels and press OK. The channels in the Favourites List are renumbered. 3 - In the Favourites List, select the channel you want to reorder and press OK. 4 - With the (up) or (down) keys move the Add a Range of Channels channel where you want it. 5 - Press OK to confirm the new location. To add a consecutive range of channels to a 6 - You can reorder channels with the same method Favourites List in one go, you can use Select Range. until you close the Favourites List with the BACK key. To add a range of channels… 1 - Open the Favourites List where you want to add a range of channels. 4.2 2 - Press OPTIONS, select Select Range and Favourite Channels press OK. 3 - In the list at the left select the first channel of the range you want to add and press OK. About Favourite Channels 4 - Press (down) to select the last channel of the range you want to add. The channels are marked at In a favourite channel list, you can collect the the left. channels you like. 5 - Press OK to add this range of channels and You can create 4 different lists of favourite channels confirm. for easy channel zapping. You can name each You can also start creating a Favourites List from Favourites List individually. Only in a Favourites List Select Range. you can reorder channels. With a Favourites List selected, press the
12 2 - Use the arrow keys to navigate. Rename a Favourites List 3 - Press a colour key to select a colour-coded subject at the bottom of the screen. You can only rename a Favourites List. Text sub-pages To rename a Favourites List… A Text page number can hold several subpages. The 1 - Open the Favourite List you want to rename. subpage numbers are shown on a bar next to the 2 - Press OPTIONS, select Rename Favourites main page number. List and press OK. To select a subpage, press or . 3 - Use the on-screen keyboard to delete the current name and enter a new name. T.O.P. Text pages 4 - When done, select Close and press OK. Some broadcasters offer T.O.P. Text. 5 - Press BACK to close the channel list. To open T.O.P. Text pages within Text, press OPTIONS and select T.O.P. Overview. Remove a Favourites List Favourite pages The TV makes a list of the last 10 Text pages you You can only remove a Favourites List. opened. You can easily reopen them again in the To remove a Favourites List… Favourite Text pages column. 1 - Open the Favourites List you want to remove. 1 - In Text, select (heart) in the top left corner of the screen to show the column of favourite pages. 2 - Press OPTIONS, select Remove Favourites List and press OK. 2 - Press (down) or (up) to select a page 3 - Confirm to remove the list. number and press OK to open the page. You can clear the list with the option Clear Favourite 4 - Press BACK to close the channel list. Pages. Search Text Reorder Channels You can select a word and scan Text for all occurences of this word. Only in a Favourites List you can change the 1 - Open a Text page and press OK. sequence of channels (reorder). 2 - Select a word or number with the arrow keys. To change the sequence of channels… 3 - Press OK again to jump immediately to the next occurence of this word or number. 1 - Open the Favourites List you want to reorder. 4 - Press OK again to jump to the subsequent 2 - Press OPTIONS, select Reorder occurence. Channels and press OK. 5 - To stop searching, press (up) until nothing is 3 - In the Favourites List, select the channel you selected. want to reorder and press OK. 4 - With the (up) or (down) keys move the Text from a connected device channel where you want it. Some devices that receive TV channels can also offer 5 - Press OK to confirm the new location. Text. 6 - You can reorder channels with the same method To open Text from a connected device . . . until you close the Favourites List with 1 - Press SOURCES select the device and the BACK key. , press OK. 2 - While watching a channel on the device, 4.3 press OPTIONS, select Show Device Keys and select the key and press OK. Text / Teletext 3 - Press BACK to hide the device keys. 4 - To close Text, press BACK again. Text Pages Digital Text (UK only) Some digital broadcasters offer dedicated Digital Text To open Text/Teletext press TEXT, while you are or interactive TV on their digital TV channels. This watching TV channels. includes normal Text using the number, colour and To close Text, press TEXT again. arrow keys to select and navigate. Select a Text page To close Digital Text, press BACK. To select a page . . . 1 - Enter the page number with the number keys.
13 Text Options 4.4 Interactive TV In Text/Teletext, press OPTIONS to select the following… About iTV • Freeze page To stop the automatic rotation of subpages. With interactive TV, some digital broadcasters • Dual screen / Full screen combine their normal TV programme with information To show the TV channel and Text alongside each or entertainment pages. On some pages, you can other. respond to a programme or vote, do online shopping • T.O.P. overview or pay for a video-on-demand programme. To open T.O.P. Text. • Enlarge HbbTV, MHEG, . . . To enlarge the Text page for comfortable reading. Broadcasters use various interactive TV systems : • Reveal HbbTV (Hybrid Broadcast Broadband TV) or iTV To unhide hidden information on a page. (Interactive TV - MHEG). Interactive TV is sometimes • Cycle subpages referred to as Digital Text or Red button. But each To cycle subpages when these are available. system is distinct. • Hide/Show Favourite Pages Visit the broadcaster's Internet website for more To hide or show the list of favourite pages. information. • Clear Favourite Pages To clear the list of favourite pages. • Language To switch the group of characters that Text uses to What You Need display correctly. • Text 2.5 Interactive TV is only available on digital TV channels. To activate the Text 2.5 for more colours and better To enjoy the full benefits of Interactive TV, you need graphics. a high-speed (broadband) Internet connection to the TV.
HbbTV Text Setup If a TV channel offers HbbTV pages, you must first switch on HbbTV in the TV settings to view the pages. Text language (TV menu) > Settings > General Some digital TV broadcasters have several Text settings > Advanced > HbbTV > On. languages available. To set your primary and secondary Text language . . . 1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK. 2 - Select Region and Language and Use iTV press (right) to enter the menu. 3 - Select Language > Primary Text or Secondary Open iTV pages Text and press OK. Most channels that offer HbbTV or iTV invite you to 4 - Select your preferred Text languages. press the colour key (red) or OK key to open 5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close their interactive programme. the menu. Navigate iTV pages Text 2.5 You can use the arrow and colour keys, the number If available, Text 2.5 offers more colours and better keys and the BACK key to navigate the iTV graphics. Text 2.5 is activated as a standard factory pages. setting. You can use the (Play), (Pause) and (Stop) To switch off Text 2.5… keys to watch videos within iTV pages. 1 - Press TEXT. 2 - With Text/Teletext open on screen, Digital Text (UK only) press OPTIONS. To open Digital Text, press TEXT. To close, 3 - Select Text 2.5 > Off and press OK. press BACK . 4 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close the menu. Close iTV pages Most iTV pages inform you which key to use to close. To force an iTV page to close, switch to the next TV
14 channel and press BACK.
15 5 select Install. 9 - If a satellite offers Channel Packages, the TV will show the available packages for that satellite. Select Channel Installation the package you need. Some packages offer 5.1 a Quick or Full install for their available channels, select one or the other. The TV will install the satellite Satellite Installation channels and radio stations. 10 - To store the satellite setup and installed About Installing Satellites channels and radio stations, select Finish.
Up to 4 Satellites You can install up to 4 satellites (4 LNBs) on this TV. Satellite Installation Settings Select the exact number of satellites you wish to The satellite installation settings are preset according install at the start of the installation. This will speed up your country. These settings determine how the TV the installation. searches and installs satellites and its channels. You Unicable can always change these settings. You can use a Unicable system to connect the To change the satellite installation settings… antenna dish to the TV. You can select Unicable for 1 1 - Start the satellite installation. or for 2 satellites at the start of the installation. 2 - On the screen where you can start searching for satellites, select Settings and press OK. MDU - Multi-Dwelling-Unit 3 - Select the number of satellites you want to install The built-in satellite tuners support MDU on the Astra or select one of the Unicable systems. When you satellites and for Digiturk on the Eutelsat satellite. select Unicable, you can choose the User Band MDU on Türksat is not supported. Numbers and enter the User Band Frequencies for each tuner. 4 - When you're done, select Next and press OK. Start the Installation 5 - On the Settings menu, press the colour key Done to return to the screen to start Make sure your satellite dish is connected correctly searching for satellites. and is perfectly aligned before you start the Homing Transponder and LNB installation. In some countries, you can adjust the expert settings To start the satellite installation… for homing transponder and each LNB. Only use or change these settings when a normal installation fails. 1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK. If you have non-standard satellite equipment, you 2 - Select Channels > Satellite Installation and can use these settings to overrule the standard press OK. Enter your PIN code if necessary. settings. Some providers might give you some 3 - Select Search for Satellite and press OK. transponder or LNB valeus which you can enter here. 4 - Select Search and press OK. TV will search for satellites. 5 - Select Install and press OK. The TV shows the current satellite installation setup. Satellite CAMs If you want to change this setup, select Settings. If you don't want to change the setup, select Search. If you use a CAM – a Conditional Access Module with Go to step 5. a smart card – to watch satellite channels, we recommend to do the satellite installation with the 6 - In Installation System, select the number of CAM inserted in the TV. satellites you want to install or select one of the Most CAMs are used to descramble channels. Unicable systems. When you select Unicable, you can choose the User Band Numbers and enter the Newest generation CAMs (CI+ 1.3 with Operator User Band Frequencies for each tuner. In some Profile), can install all the satellite channels by countries, you can adjust some expert settings for themselves on your TV. The CAM will invite you to each LNB in More Settings. install its satellite(s) and channels. These CAMs not 7 - The TV will search for the satellites available on only install and descramble the channels but also the alignment of your antenna dish. This may take a handle regular channel updates. few minutes. If a satellite is found, its name and reception strength are shown on screen. 8 - When the TV found the satellites you need,
16 Channel Packages User Band Frequency
Satellite operators can offer channel packages that Next to the unique user band number, the built-in bundle free channels (free-to-air) and offer a sorting satellite receiver needs the frequency of the selected that suits a country. Some satellites offer subscription user band number. These frequencies are mostly packages - a collection of channels you pay for. shown next to the user band number on a Unicable switchbox. If you choose a subscription package, the TV might ask you to select a Quick or Full installation. Select Quick to install the channels of the package only or select Full to install the package and all Manual Channel Update other available channels too. We recommend a Quick You can always start an channel update yourself. installation for subscription packages. If you have additional satellites that are not part of your To start a channel update manually… subscription package, we recommend a Full 1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK. installation. All installed channels are put in the 2 - Select Channels > Satellite Installation and channels list All. press OK. 3 - Select Search for Channels and press OK. 4 - Select Update Channels and press OK. The TV Unicable Setup will start updating. The update may take a few minutes. The Unicable System 5 - Follow the instructions on screen. The update may take a few minutes. You can use a Single Cable system, MDU or Unicable 6 - Select Finish and press OK. system to connect the antenna dish to the TV. A Single Cable system uses one cable to connect the satellite dish to all satellite tuners in its system. A Single Cable system is typically used in apartment Add a Satellite buildings. If you use a Unicable system, the TV will ask You can add an additional satellite to your current you to assign a user band number and corresponding satellite installation. The installed satellites and their frequency during the installation. You can install 1 or 2 channels remain untouched. Some satellite operators satellites with Unicable on this TV. do not allow adding a satellite. If you notice some missing channels after a Unicable The additional satellite should be seen as an extra, it installation, another installation might have been is not your main satellite subscription or not the main done at the same moment on the Unicable system. satellite of which you use its channel package. Do the installation again to install the missing Typically, you would add a 4th satellite when you channels. have 3 satellites already installed. If you have 4 satellites installed, you might consider removing one first to be able to add a new satellite. User Band Number Setup In a Unicable system, each connected satellite tuner must be numbered (e.g. 0, 1, 2 or 3 etc.). If you currently have only 1 or 2 satellites installed, the current installation settings might not allow adding an You can find the available user bands and their extra satellite. If you need to change the installation number on the Unicable switchbox. User band is settings, you must redo the complete satellite sometimes shortened as UB. There are Unicable installation. You cannot use Add satellite if a change switchboxes that offer 4 or 8 user bands. If you select of settings is needed. Unicable in the settings, the TV will ask you to assign the unique user band number for each built-in To add a satellite… satellite tuners. A satellite tuner cannot have the same 1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK. user band number as another satellite tuner in the 2 - Select Channels > Satellite Installation and Unicable system. press OK. 3 - Select Search for satellite and press OK. 4 - Select Add Satellite and press OK. The current satellites are shown. 5 - Select Search and press OK. The TV will search for new satellites. 6 - If the TV has found one or more satellites, select Install and press OK. The TV installs the
17 channels of the found satellites. 7 - Select Finish and press OK to store the Homing Transponder and LNB channels and radio stations. In some countries, you can adjust the expert settings for homing transponder and each LNB. Only use or change these settings when a normal installation fails. Remove a Satellite If you have non-standard satellite equipment, you can use these settings to overrule the standard You can remove one or more satellites from your settings. Some providers might give you some current satellite installation. You remove the satellite transponder or LNB valeus which you can enter here. and its channels. Some satellite operators do not allow removing a satellite. LNB Power To remove satellites… By default, LNB Power is set to On. 1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK. 22 kHz Tone 2 - Select Channels > Satellite Installation and By default, the Tone is set to Auto. press OK. 3 - Select Search for satellite and press OK. Low LO Frequency / High LO Frequency 4 - Select Remove Satellite and press OK. The current satellites are shown. The local oscillator frequencies are set to standard 5 - Select a satellite and press OK to mark or values. Adjust the values only in case of exceptional unmark them to remove. equipment that needs different values. 6 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close the menu. Problems
Manual Installation The TV cannot find the satellites I want or the TV installs the same satellite twice Manual Installation is intended for expert users. • Make sure that the correct number of satellites is set You can use Manual Installation to quickly add new in Settings at the start of the installation. You can set channels from a satellite transponder. You need to the TV to search for One, Two or 3/4 satellites. know the frequency and polarization of the A dual head LNB cannot find a second satellite transponder. The TV will install all channels of that transponder. If the transponder was installed before, • If the TV finds one satellite but cannot find a second all its channels - the former and the new ones - are one, turn the dish a few degrees. Align the dish to get moved to the end of the channel list All. the strongest signal on the first satellite. Check the You cannot use Manual installation if you need to signal strength indicator of the first satellite on screen. change the number of satellites. If this is needed, you With the first satellite set at the strongest signal, select have to do a complete installation with Install Search again to find the second satellite. Satellites. • Make sure the settings are set to Two Satellites. To install a transponder… Changing the installation settings did not solve my 1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK. problem 2 - Select Channels > Satellite Installation and • All settings, satellites and channels are only stored press OK. at the end of the installation when you finish. 3 - Select Manual Installation and press (right) to enter the menu. All satellite channels are gone 4 - If you have more than 1 satellite installed, • If you use a Unicable system, make sure you select LNB for which you want to add channels. assigned two unique user band numbers for both 5 - Set the Polarisation you need. If you set built-in tuners in the Unicable settings. It might be the Symbol Rate Mode to Manual, you can enter that another satellite receiver in your Unicable system the symbol rate in Symbol Rate manually. is using the same user band number. 6 - Press the arrows (up) or (down) to adjust the frequency, and select Done. Some satellite channels seem to have disappeared 7 - Select Search and press OK. The signal from the channel list strenght is shown on screen. • If some channels seem to be gone or displaced, the 8 - If you want to store the channels of a new broadcaster might have changed the transponder transponder, select Store and press OK. location of these channels. To restore the channel 9 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close positions in the channel list, you can try an update of the menu.
18 the channel package. Manual Channel Update I cannot remove a satellite You can always start an channel update yourself. • Subscription packages do not allow removing a To start a channel update manually… satellite. To remove the satellite, you have to do a complete installation again and select another 1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK. package. 2 - Select Channels > Antenna/Cable Installation and press OK. Sometimes the reception is poor 3 - Enter your PIN code if necessary. • Check if the satellite dish is solidly mounted. Strong 4 - Select Search for Channels and press OK. winds can move the dish. 5 - Select Start and press OK. • Snow and rain can degrade the reception. 6 - Select Update Digital Channels, select Next and press OK. 7 - Select Start and press OK to update the digital 5.2 channels. This can take a few minutes. 8 - Press (left) to go back one step or Antenna/Cable Installation press BACK to close the menu. Update Channels Reinstall Channels Automatic Channel Update
If you receive digital channels, you can set the TV to Reinstall All Channels automatically update these channels. You can reinstall all channels and leave all other TV Once a day, at 6 AM, the TV updates the channels settings untouched. and stores new channels. New channels are stored in If a PIN code is set, you will need to enter this code the Channels List and are marked with a . before you can reinstall channels. Channels without a signal are removed. The TV must be in standby to automatically update channels. You To reinstall channels… can switch off Auromatic Channel Update. 1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK. To switch off the automatic update… 2 - Select Channels > Antenna/Cable Installation and press OK. 1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK. 3 - Enter your PIN code if necessary. 2 - Select Channels > Antenna/Cable 4 - Select Search for Channels and press OK. Installation and press OK. 5 - Select Start and press OK. 3 - Enter your PIN code if necessary. 6 - Select Reinstall Channels, select Next and 4 - Select Automatic Channel Update and press OK. press OK. 7 - Select the country where you are now and 5 - Select Off and press OK. press OK. 6 - Press (left) to go back one step or 8 - Select Next and press OK. press BACK to close the menu. 9 - Select the type of installation you want, Antenna When new channels are found or if channels are (DVB-T) or Cable (DVB-C) and press OK. updated or removed, a message is shown at TV start 8 - Select Next and press OK. up. To avoid this message to appear after every 11 - Select the type of channels you want, Digital channel update, you can switch it off. and Analogue Channels or Only Digital Channels and press OK. To switch off the message… 8 - Select Next and press OK. 1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK. 13 - Select Start and press OK to update the 2 - Select Channels > Antenna/Cable digital channels. This can take a few minutes. Installation and press OK. 14 - Press (left) to go back one step or 3 - Enter your PIN code if necessary. press BACK to close the menu. 4 - Select Channel Update Message and press OK. 5 - Select Off and press OK. 6 - Press (left) to go back one step or Reinstall TV press BACK to close the menu. You can redo a full TV installation. The TV is In certain countries, the Automatic channel update is completely reinstalled. done while watching TV or on any moment when the TV is in standby. To redo a full TV installation…
19 1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK. Frequency Scan 2 - Select General Settings > Reinstall TV and press OK. Select the method of searching for channels. You can 3 - Enter your PIN code if necessary. select the faster Quick Scan method and use the 4 - Select Yes and press OK to confirm. predefined settings used by most cable operator in 5 - The TV will reinstall completely. All settings will your country. be reset and installed channels will be replaced. The If this results in having no channels installed or if installation can take a few minutes. some channels are missing, you can select the 6 - Press (left) to go back one step or extended Full Scan method. This method will take press BACK to close the menu. more time to search for and install channels.
DVB-T or DVB-C Frequency Step Size
DVB-T or DVB-C Reception The TV searches for channels in steps of 8MHz.
During the channel installation, just before you search If this results in having no channels installed or if for channels, you selected Antenna (DVB-T) or Cable some channels are missing, you can search in smaller (DVB-C). Antenna DVB-T searches for terrestrial steps of 1MHz. Using the 1MHz steps will take more analogue channels and digital DVB-T/T2 channels. time to search for and install channels. Cable DVB-C searches for analogue and digital channels available from a cable DVB-C operator. Digital Channels DVB-C Channel Installation If you know your cable operator is not offering digital For ease of use, all DVB-C settings are set to channels, you can skip searching for digital channels. automatic. If your DVB-C operator gave you specific DVB-C values, the network ID or network frequency, enter these values when the TV asks for them during Analogue Channels installation. If you know your cable operator is not offering Channel Number Conflicts analogue channels, you can skip searching for analogue channels. In some countries, different TV channels (broadcasters) might have the same channel number. While installing, the TV shows the list with channel number conflicts. You need to select which TV Free / Scrambled channel you want to install on a channel number with If you have a subscription and a CAM - Conditional multiple TV channels. Access Module for pay TV services, select Free + Scrambled. If you did not subscribe to pay TV channels or services, you can select Free DVB Settings Channels Only .
Network Frequency Mode For more information, in Help, press the colour key Keywords and look up CAM, Conditional If you intend to use the fast Quick Scan method Access Module. in Frequency Scan to search for channels, select Automatic. The TV will use 1 of the predefined network frequencies (or HC - homing channel) as Reception Quality used by most cable operator in your country. You can check the quality and signal strength of a If you received a specific network frequency value to digital channel. If you have your own antenna, you search for channels, select Manual. can reposition the antenna to try and improve the reception.
Network Frequency To check the reception quality of a digital channel… 1 - Tune to the channel. With the Network Frequency Mode set to Manual, 2 - Press , select All Settings and press OK. you can enter the network frequency value received 3 - Select Channels > Antenna/Cable from your cable operator here. To enter the value, use Installation and press OK. Enter your PIN code if the number keys. necessary.
20 4 - Select Digital: Reception Test and press OK. 5.3 5 - Select Search and press OK. The digital frequency is shown for this channel. Channel List Copy 6 - Select Search again and press OK to check the signal quality of this frequency. The test result is Introduction shown on screen. You can reposition the antenna or check the connections to possibly improve the Channel List Copy is intended for dealers and expert reception. users. 7 - You can also change the frequency With Channel List Copy, you can copy the channels yourself. Select the frequency number one by one installed on one TV onto another Philips TV of the and use the (up) or (down) keys to change same range. With Channel List Copy, you avoid the the value. Select Search and press OK to test the time-consuming channel search by uploading a reception again. predefined channel list on a TV. Use a USB flash drive 8 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close of minimum 1 GB. the menu. Conditions • Both TVs are from the same year range. Manual Installation • Both TVs have the same hardware type. Check the hardware type on the TV type plate on the back of Analogue TV channels can be manually installed, the TV. Typically noted as Q . . . LA channel by channel. • Both TVs have compatible software versions. Current channel version To install analogue channels manually… To check the current version of the channel list… 1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK. 2 - Select Channels > Antenna/Cable 1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK. Installation and press OK. Enter your PIN code if 2 - Select Channels, select Channel List Copy, necessary. select Current Version and press OK. 3 - Select Analogue: Manual Installation and 3 - Press OK to close. press OK. Current software version • System To check the cuurent version of the TV software… To set up the TV system, select System. Select your country or the part of the world where 1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK. you are now and press OK. 2 - Select Update Software and press (right) to enter the menu. • Search Channel 3 - Select Current Software Info and press OK. To find a channel, select Search Channel and 4 - The version, release notes and creation date are press OK. You can enter a frequency yourself to find shown. Also, the Netflix ESN Number is shown if a channel or let the TV search for a channel. available. Press (right) to select Search and press OK to 5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close search for a channel automatically. The found the menu. channel is shown on screen and if the reception is poor, press Search again. If you want to store the channel, select Done and press OK. Copy a Channel List • Store You can store the channel on the current channel To copy a channel list… number or as a new channel number. 1 - Switch on the TV. This TV should have channels Select Store Current Channel or Store as New installed. Channel and press OK. The new channel number is 2 - Plug in a USB flash drive. shown briefly. 3 - Press , select All Settings and press OK. You can redo these steps until you have found all 4 - Select Channels > Channel List Copy and available analogue TV channels. press OK. 5 - Select Copy to USB and press OK. You might be asked to enter the Child Lock PIN code to copy the channel list. 6 - When copying is done, unplug the USB flash drive. 7 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close the menu.
21 Now you can upload the copied channel list onto select All Settings and press OK. another Philips TV. 4 - Select Channels > Channel List Copy > Copy to TV and press OK. Enter your PIN code if necessary. 5 - The TV notifies you if the channel list is copied to Channel List Version the TV successfully. Unplug the USB flash drive. Check the current version of the channel list... 1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK. 5.4 2 - Select Channels and press (right) to enter the menu. Satellite List Copy 3 - Select Channel List Copy and select Current Version, then press OK. Introduction 4 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close the menu. Satellite List Copy is intended for dealers and expert users. With Satellite List Copy, you can copy the channels Upload a Channel List installed on one TV onto another Philips TV of the same range. With Satellite List Copy, you avoid the To not Installed TVs time-consuming channel search by uploading a predefined channel list on a TV. Use a USB flash drive Depending on whether your TV is already installed or of minimum 1 GB. not, you must use a different method to upload a channel list. Conditions • Both TVs are from the same year range. To a TV that is not yet installed • Both TVs have the same hardware type. Check the 1 - Plug in the power plug to start the installation and hardware type on the TV type plate on the back of select language and country. You can skip the the TV. Typically noted as Q . . . LA channel search. Finish the installation. • Both TVs have compatible software versions. 2 - Plug in the USB flash drive that holds the channel Current channel version list of the other TV. 3 - To start the channel list upload, press , To check the current version of the channel list… select All Settings and press OK. 1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK. 4 - Select Channels > Channel List Copy > Copy 2 - Select Channels, select Satellite List Copy, to TV and press OK. Enter your PIN code if select Current Version and press OK. necessary. 3 - Press OK to close. 5 - The TV notifies you if the channel list is copied to Current software version the TV successfully. Unplug the USB flash drive. To check the cuurent version of the TV software… 1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK. To Installed TVs 2 - Select Update Software and press (right) to enter the menu. Depending on whether your TV is already installed or 3 - Select Current Software Info and press OK. not, you must use a different method to upload a 4 - The version, release notes and creation date are channel list. shown. Also, the Netflix ESN Number is shown if To an already installed TV available. 1 - Verify the country setting of the TV. (To verify this 5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close setting, see chapter Reinstall All Channels. Start this the menu. procedure until you reach the country setting. Press BACK to cancel the installation.) If the country is correct continue with step 2. Copy a Channel List If the country is not correct, you need to start a reinstallation. See chapter Reinstall All Channels and To copy a channel list… start the installation. Select the correct country and skip the channels search. Finish the installation. When 1 - Switch on the TV. This TV should have channels done, continue with step 2. installed. 2 - Plug in the USB flash drive that holds the channel 2 - Plug in a USB flash drive. list of the other TV. 3 - Press , select All Settings and press OK. 4 - Select Channels > Satellite List Copy and 3 - To start the channel list upload, press , press OK.
22 5 - Select Copy to USB and press OK. You might reinstallation. See chapter Reinstall All Channels and be asked to enter the Child Lock PIN code to copy the start the installation. Select the correct country and channel list. skip the channels search. Finish the installation. When 6 - When copying is done, unplug the USB flash done, continue with step 2. drive. 2 - Plug in the USB flash drive that holds the channel 7 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close list of the other TV. the menu. 3 - To start the channel list upload, press , select All Settings and press OK. Now you can upload the copied channel list onto 4 - Select Channels > Satellite List Copy > Copy another Philips TV. to TV and press OK. Enter your PIN code if necessary. 5 - The TV notifies you if the channel list is copied to Channel List Version the TV successfully. Unplug the USB flash drive.
Check the current version of the channel list... 1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK. 2 - Select Channels and press (right) to enter the menu. 3 - Select Satellite List Copy and select Current Version, then press OK. 4 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close the menu.
Upload a Channel List
To not Installed TVs
Depending on whether your TV is already installed or not, you must use a different method to upload a channel list.
To a TV that is not yet installed 1 - Plug in the power plug to start the installation and select language and country. You can skip the channel search. Finish the installation. 2 - Plug in the USB flash drive that holds the channel list of the other TV. 3 - To start the channel list upload, press , select All Settings and press OK. 4 - Select Channels > Satellite List Copy > Copy to TV and press OK. Enter your PIN code if necessary. 5 - The TV notifies you if the channel list is copied to the TV successfully. Unplug the USB flash drive.
To Installed TVs
Depending on whether your TV is already installed or not, you must use a different method to upload a channel list.
To an already installed TV 1 - Verify the country setting of the TV. (To verify this setting, see chapter Reinstall All Channels. Start this procedure until you reach the country setting. Press BACK to cancel the installation.) If the country is correct continue with step 2. If the country is not correct, you need to start a
23 6 HDMI ARC Connect Devices All of the HDMI connections on the TV have HDMI ARC (Audio Return Channel). 6.1 If the device, typically a Home Theatre System (HTS), also has the HDMI ARC connection, connect it to any About Connections of the HDMI connections on this TV. With the HDMI ARC connection, you do not need to connect the Connectivity Guide extra audio cable that sends the sound of the TV picture to the HTS. The HDMI ARC connection Always connect a device to the TV with the highest combines both signals. quality connection available. Also, use good quality cables to ensure a good transfer of picture and You can use any HDMI connection on this TV to sound. connect the HTS but ARC is only available for 1 device/connection at a time. When you connect a device, the TV recognizes its type and gives each device a correct type name. You can change the type name if you wish. If a correct type name for a device is set, the TV automatically switches to the ideal TV settings when you switch to this device in the Sources menu.
Antenna port
If you have a Set-top box (a digital receiver) or Recorder, connect the antenna cables to run the antenna signal through the Set-top box and/or Recorder first before it enters the TV. In this way, the antenna and the Set-top box can send possible additional channels to the Recorder to record.
HDMI ports
HDMI Quality
An HDMI connection has the best picture and sound quality. One HDMI cable combines video and audio signals. Use an HDMI cable for TV signal. For best signal quality transfer, use a High speed HDMI MHL HDMI cable and do not use an HDMI cable longer With HDMI MHL, you can send what you see on your than 5 m. Android smartphone or tablet to a TV screen. If a device connected with HDMI is not working The HDMI 1 connection on this TV correctly, check if a different HDMI Ultra HD setting incorporates MHL 2.0 (Mobile High-Definition Link). can solve this problem. In Help, press the colour key Keywords and look up HDMI Ultra HD. This wired connection offers great stability and bandwidth, low latency, no wireless interference and Copy protection good quality sound reproduction. On top of that, the HDMI cables support HDCP 2.2 (High-bandwidth MHL connection will charge the battery of your Digital Content Protection). HDCP is a copy protection smartphone or tablet. Although connected, your signal that prevents copying content from a DVD disc mobile device will not be charging when the TV is on or Blu-ray Disc. Also referred to as DRM (Digital standby. Rights Management). Inform yourself about what passive MHL cable is suited for your mobile device. In particular, with the
24 HDMI connector for the TV on one side, the type of 6.2 connector you need to connect to your smartphone or tablet. CAM with Smart Card - CI+ MHL, Mobile High-Definition Link and the MHL Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of the MHL, CI+ LLC. This TV is ready for the CI+ Conditional Access . With CI+ you can watch premium HD programmes, like movies and sports, offered by digital TV operators in your region. These programmes are scrambled by the TV operator and descrambled with a prepaid CI+ module. Digital TV operators provide a CI+ module (Conditional Access Module - CAM) and an HDMI CEC - EasyLink accompanying smart card, when you subscribe to their premium programmes. These programmes have An HDMI connection has the best picture and sound a high level of copy protection. quality. One HDMI cable combines video and audio Contact a digital TV operator for more information on signals. Use an HDMI cable for High Definition (HD) terms & conditions. TV signals. For best signal quality transfer, use a High speed HDMI cable and do not use an HDMI cable longer than 5 m. Connect HDMI CEC-compatible devices to your TV, you can operate them with the TV remote control. EasyLink HDMI CEC must be switched on on the TV and the connected device.
Switch on EasyLink (TV menu) > Settings > General Smart Card settings > EasyLink > EasyLink > On. Digital TV operators provide a CI+ module (Conditional Access Module - CAM) and an accompanying smart card, when you subscribe to Operate HDMI CEC-compatible devices with TV their premium programmes. remote control Insert the smart card into the CAM module. See the (TV menu) > Settings > General instruction you received from the operator. settings > EasyLink > EasyLink remote control > On. To insert the CAM in the TV… 1 - Look on the CAM for the correct method of insertion. Incorrect insertion can damage the CAM Note: and TV. • EasyLink might not work with devices from other 2 - While looking at the back of the TV, with the front brands. of the CAM facing towards you, gently insert the CAM • The HDMI CEC functionality has different names on into the slot COMMON INTERFACE. different brands. Some examples are: Anynet, Aquos 3 - Push the CAM in as far as it will go. Leave it in the Link, Bravia Theatre Sync, Kuro Link, Simplink and slot permanently. Viera Link. Not all brands are fully compatible with EasyLink. Example HDMI CEC branding names are property of their respective owners.
25 6.3 Home Theatre System - HTS
Connect with HDMI ARC
Use an HDMI cable to connect a Home Theatre System (HTS) to the TV. You can connect a Philips Soundbar or an HTS with a built-in disc player.
HDMI ARC If your Home Theatre System has an HDMI ARC connection, you can use any HDMI connection on the TV to connect. With HDMI ARC, you do not need to connect the extra audio cable. The HDMI ARC connection combines both signals. All HDMI connections on the TV can offer the Audio Return Channel (ARC) signal. But once you have connected the Home Theatre System, the TV can only send the ARC signal to this HDMI connection.
Audio to video synchronisation (sync) If the sound does not match the video on screen, you can set a delay on most Home Theatre Systems with a disc player to match the sound with the video.
When you switch on the TV, it may take a few minutes before the CAM is activated. If a CAM is inserted and Connect with HDMI subscription fees are paid (subscription methods can Use an HDMI cable to connect a Home Theatre differ), you can watch the scrambled channels System (HTS) to the TV. You can connect a Philips supported by the CAM smart card. Soundbar or an HTS with a built-in disc player. The CAM and smart card are exclusively for your TV. If If the Home Theatre System has no HDMI ARC you remove the CAM, you will no longer be able to connection, add an optical audio cable (Toslink) to watch the scrambled channels supported by the send the sound of the TV picture to the Home Theatre CAM. System.
Audio to video synchronisation (sync) If the sound does not match the video on screen, you can set a delay on most Home Theatre Systems with Passwords and PIN codes a disc player to match the sound with the video. For some CAMs, you must enter a PIN code to watch its channels. When you set the PIN code for the CAM, we recommend you to use the same code you are Problems with HTS sound using to unlock the TV. To set the PIN code for the CAM… Sound with loud noise 1 - Press SOURCES . If you watch a video from a plugged in USB flash drive 2 - Select the channel type you are using the CAM or connected computer, the sound from your Home for Watch TV. Theatre System might be distorted. This noise is heard 3 - Press OPTIONS and select Common when the audio or video file has DTS sound but the Interface. Home Theatre System has no DTS sound processing. 4 - Select the TV operator of the CAM. The following You can fix this by setting the Digital Out Format of screens come from the TV operator. Follow the on- the TV to Stereo. screen instruction to look up the PIN code setting. Press for All Settings > Sound > Advanced > Digital Out Format .
No sound
26 If you cannot hear the sound from the TV on your Home Theatre System, check if you connected the HDMI cable to an HDMI ARC connection on the Home Theatre System. All HDMI connections on the TV are HDMI ARC connections.
6.4 Smartphones and Tablets
To connect a smartphone or tablet to the TV, you can use a wireless or wired connection.
Wireless For a wireless connection, on your smartphone or tablet download the Philips TV Remote App from your favourite app store.
Wired For a wired connection, use the HDMI 1 MHL connection on the back of the TV.
6.5 Blu-ray Disc Player
Use a High speed HDMI cable to connect the Blu- 6.7 ray Disc player to the TV. If the Blu-ray Disc player has EasyLink HDMI CEC, Bluetooth you can operate the player with the TV remote control. What You Need
In Help, press the colour key Keywords and You can connect a wireless device with Bluetooth® to look up EasyLink HDMI CEC for more information. this TV – a wireless speaker or headphones. You can also connect a wireless gamepad with Bluetooth LE. 6.6 To play the TV sound on a wireless speaker, you must pair the wireless speaker with the TV. The TV can only DVD Player play the sound on one speaker at a time.
Use an HDMI cable to connect the DVD player to the Attention - Audio to Video syncronisation TV. Many Bluetooth speaker systems have a high, so If the DVD player is connected with HDMI and has called, 'latency'. High latency means that the audio EasyLink CEC, you can operate the player with the TV lags behind the video, causing unsynchronised 'lip remote control. sync'. Before you purchase a wireless Bluetooth speaker system, inform yourself about the newest For more information on EasyLink, in Help, press the models and look for a device with a low latency colour key Keywords and look up EasyLink rating. Ask your dealer for advice. HDMI CEC.
Y Pb Pr - Component Video is a high quality connection. The YPbPr connection can be used for High Definition (HD) TV signals.
27 press OK. Pairing a Device 5 - Select Disconnect or Remove and press OK. 6 - Select OK and press OK to confirm. Read the user manual of the device for specific 7 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close information on pairing and on wireless range. Make the menu. sure the Bluetooth setting on TV is switched on. Once a wireless gamepad is paired, you can use it. When a device is paired, you do not need to pair it 6.8 again unless you remove the device. Headphones To pair a bluetooth device with the TV… 1 - Switch on the bluetooth device and place it within You can connect a set of headphones to range of the TV. the connection on the back of the TV. The connection is a mini-jack 3.5mm. You can adjust the 2 - Press , select All Settings and press OK. 3 - Select Wireless and Networks and volume of the headphones separately. press (right) to enter the menu. To adjust the volume… 4 - Select Bluetooth > Search Bluetooth Device, 1 - Press , select Headphone Volume and and press OK. press OK. 5 - Select Start and press OK. Follow the 2 - Press the arrows (up) or (down) to adjust instuctions on screen. You will pair the device with the the value. TV and the TV will store the connection. You might 3 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close need to unpair a paired device first if the maximum the menu. number of paired devices was reached. 6 - Select the type of device and press OK. 7 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close the menu. * Your TV doesn't support Bluetooth subwoofer and Bluetooth speakers. ** HDMI connection is required for sound bar, speaker and other audio device.
Select a Device
To select a wireless device… 1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK. 2 - Select Wireless and Networks and press OK. 3 - Select Bluetooth > Search for a device and press OK. 4 - In the list, select the wireless device and press OK. 5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close the menu.
Remove a Device
You can connect or disconnect a wireless Bluetooth device. You can also remove a wireless Bluetooth device. If you remove a Bluetooth device, the device 6.9 will be unpaired. Game Console To remove or disconnect a wireless device… 1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK. 2 - Select Wireless and Networks and press OK. 3 - Select Bluetooth > Remove Bluetooth device and press OK. 4 - In the list, select the wireless device and
28 HDMI
For best quality, connect the game console with a High speed HDMI cable to the TV.
6.10 USB Hard Drive
What You Need
If you connect a USB Hard Drive, you can pause or record digital TV broadcasts (DVB broadcasts or similar).
Minimum Disk Space • To Pause To pause a broadcast, you need a USB 2.0 compatible Hard Drive with a minimum of 4GB disk space. • To Record To pause and record a broadcast, you need a minimum of 250GB disk space. For more information on how to install a USB Hard Drive, in Help, press the colour Y Pb Pr key Keywords and look up USB Hard Drive, installation. Connect the game console with a component video cable (Y Pb Pr) and an audio L/R cable to the TV. Installation
Before you can pause or record a broadcast, you must connect and format a USB Hard Drive. Formatting removes all files from the USB Hard Drive. 1 - Connect the USB Hard Drive to one of the USB connections on the TV. Do not connect another USB device to the other USB ports when formatting. 2 - Switch on the USB Hard Drive and the TV. 3 - When the TV is tuned to a digital TV channel, press (Pause). Trying to pause will start the formatting. Follow the instructions on screen. When the USB Hard Drive is formatted, leave it connected permanently.
29 connections on the TV. Do not connect another USB device to the other USB ports when formatting. 2 - Switch on the USB Hard Drive and the TV. 3 - Select Recordings if you want to perform Pause TV and Recordings, otherwise, select Apps to store apps. Follow the instructions on screen. 4 - All files and data will be removed after formatting. 5 - When the USB Hard Drive is formatted, leave it connected permanently. For more information, in Help, press the colour key Keywords and look up Pause TV, Recording, or Apps.
6.11 USB Keyboard
Connect
Connect a USB keyboard (USB-HID type) to enter text on your TV. Use one of the USB connections to connect.
Configure Warning Install the keyboard The USB Hard Drive is formatted exclusively for this TV, you cannot use the stored recordings on another To install the USB keyboard, switch on the TV and TV or PC. Do not copy or change recording files on connect the USB keyboard to one of the USB Hard Drive with any PC application. This will the USB connections on the TV. When the TV corrupt your recordings. When you format another detects the keyboard for the first time, you can select USB Hard Drive, the content on the former will be lost. your keyboard lay-out and test your selection. If you A USB Hard Drive installed on your TV will need select a Cyrillic or Greek keyboard layout first, you reformatting for use with a computer. can select a secondary Latin keyboard layout. To change the keyboard layout setting when a layout was selected… Formatting 1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK. 2 - Select General Settings and press (right) to Before you can pause or record a broadcast, or store enter the menu. apps, you must connect and format a USB Hard 3 - Select USB Keyboard Settings, and press OK to Drive. Formatting removes all files from the USB Hard start the keyboard setup. Drive. If you want to record broadcasts with TV Guide data from the Internet, you must setup the Internet connection first before you install the USB Hard Drive. Special Keys Warning The USB Hard Drive is formatted exclusively for this Keys for entering text TV, you cannot use the stored recordings on another • Enter key = OK TV or PC. Do not copy or change recording files on • Backspace = delete character before cursor the USB Hard Drive with any PC application. This will • Arrow keys = navigate within a text field corrupt your recordings. When you format another • To switch between keyboard layouts, if a secondary USB Hard Drive, the content on the former will be lost. layout is set, press the Ctrl + Spacebar keys A USB Hard Drive installed on your TV will need simultaneously. reformatting for use with a computer. Keys for apps and Internet pages To format a USB Hard Drive… • Tab and Shift + Tab = Next and Previous • Home = scroll to the top of the page 1 - Connect the USB Hard Drive to one of the USB
30 • End = scroll to the bottom of the page For more information on watching or playing content • Page Up = jump one page up from a USB flash drive, in Help, press the colour • Page Down = jump one page down key Keywords and look up Photos, Videos and • + = zoom in one step Music. • - = zoom out one step • * = fit the web page to the screen width 6.13
6.12 Photo Camera USB Flash Drive To view photos stored on your digital photo camera, you can connect the camera directly to the TV. You can view photos or play your music and videos Use one of the USB connections on the TV to from a connected USB flash drive. connect. Switch on the camera after you made the Insert a USB flash drive in one of connection. the USB connections on the TV while the TV is If the contents list does not appear automatically, switched on. press SOURCES , and select USB. Your camera might need to be set to transfer its content with PTP (Picture Transfer Protocol). Read the user manual of the digital photo camera.
Ultra HD on USB You can view photos in Ultra HD resolution from a connected USB device or flash drive. The TV will downscale the resolution to Ultra HD if the resolution of the photo is higher. You cannot play a native Ultra HD video on any of the USB connections.
The TV detects the flash drive and opens a list showing its content. If the contents list does not appear automatically, press SOURCES and select USB. To stop watching the USB flash drive content, press EXIT or select another activity. To disconnect the USB flash drive, you can pull out the flash drive anytime.
Ultra HD on USB For more information on viewing photos, in Help, press the colour key Keywords and look You can view photos in Ultra HD resolution from a up Photos, Videos and Music. connected USB device or flash drive. The TV will downscale the resolution to Ultra HD if the resolution of the photo is higher. You cannot play a native Ultra HD video on any of the USB connections.
31 6.14 Camcorder
For best quality, connect the game console with a High speed HDMI cable to the TV.
6.16 Computer
Connect
You can connect your computer to the TV and use the TV as a PC monitor.
With HDMI Use an HDMI cable to connect the computer to the TV.
With DVI to HDMI Alternatively, you can use a DVI to HDMI adapter (sold separately) to connect the PC to HDMI and an audio L/R cable (mini-jack 3.5mm) to AUDIO IN L/R on the back of the TV.
6.15 Ideal Setting HDMI If you connect a computer, we advice you to give the connection, on which the computer is connected, the For best quality, connect the game console with a correct device type name in the Source menu. If you High speed HDMI cable to the TV. then switch to Computer in the Source menu, the TV is set to the ideal Computer setting automatically. To set the TV to the ideal setting… 1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK. 2 - Select Picture and press (right) to enter the menu. 3 - Select Advanced > Computer, and press OK. 4 - Select On or Off, and press OK. 5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close the menu.
32 7 devices in your wireless network that use the WEP security encryption system, you cannot use WPS. Connect your 1 - Go to the router, press the WPS button and return to the TV within 2 minutes. 2 - Select Connect to make the connection. Android TV 3 - A message will be shown when the connection is successful. 7.1 Network and Internet Make the Connection - WPS with PIN Code Home Network (TV menu) > Settings > Wireless and Networks > Wired or Wi-Fi > Connect to To enjoy the full capabilities of your Philips Android Network > WPS with PIN Code. TV, your TV must be connected to the Internet. If your router has WPS with a PIN code, you can Connect the TV to a home network with a high-speed directly connect to the router without scanning for Internet connection. You can connect your TV networks. If you have devices in your wireless wirelessly or wired to your network router. network that use the WEP security encryption system, you cannot use WPS. 1 - Write down the 8-digit PIN code shown on screen Connect to Network and enter it in the router software on your PC. Consult the router manual on where to enter the PIN code in Wireless Connection the router software. 2 - Select Connect to make the connection. What You Need 3 - A message will be shown when the connection is successful. To connect the TV to the Internet wirelessly, you need a Wi-Fi router with a connection to the Internet.
Use a high-speed (broadband) connection to the Problems Internet. Wireless network not found or distorted • Microwave ovens, DECT phones or other Wi-Fi Make the Connection 802.11b/g/n devices in your proximity might disturb the wireless network. Make the Connection - Wireless • Make sure that the firewalls in your network allow access to the TV's wireless connection. (TV menu) > Settings > Wireless and • If the wireless network does not work properly in Networks > Wired or Wi-Fi > Connect to your home, try the wired network installation. Network > Wireless. Internet does not work 1 - In the list of found networks, select on your • If the connection to the router is OK, check the wireless network. If your network is not in the list router connection to the Internet. because the network name is hidden (you switched The PC and Internet connection are slow off the SSID broadcast of the router), select Add New • Look in your wireless router's user manual for Network to enter the network name yourself. information on indoor range, transfer rate and other 2 - Depending on the type of router, enter your factors of signal quality. encryption key - WEP, WPA or WPA2. If you entered • Use a high-speed (broadband) Internet connection the encryption key for this network before, you can for your router. select OK to make the connection immediately. 3 - A message will be shown when the connection is DHCP successful. • If the connection fails, you can check the DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) setting of the router. DHCP should be switched on. Make the Connection - WPS In Help, press the colour key Keywords and look up Troubleshooting for more information. (TV menu) > Settings > Wireless and Networks > Wired or Wi-Fi > Connect to Network > WPS. If your router has WPS, you can directly connect to the router without scanning for networks. If you have
33 Wired Connection Network Settings
What You Need View Network Settings To connect the TV to the Internet, you need a (TV menu) > Settings > Networks > Wired network router with a connection to the or Wi-Fi > View Network Settings. Internet. Use a high-speed (broadband) connection to the Internet. You can view all current network settings here. The IP and MAC address, signal strength, speed, encryption method, etc.
Network Configuration - Static IP (TV menu) > Settings > Networks > Wired or Wi-Fi > Network Configuration > Static IP. If you are an advanced user and want to install your network with Static IP addressing, set the TV to Static IP.
Network Configuration - Static IP Configuration (TV menu) > Settings > Networks > Wired or Wi-Fi > Network Configuration > Static IP Configuration. 1 - Select Static IP Configuration and configure the connection. 2 - You can set the number for IP Address, Netmask, Gateway, DNS 1, or DNS 2.
Switch On with Wi-Fi (WoWLAN) (TV menu) > Settings > Networks > Wired Make the Connection or Wi-Fi > Switch On with Wi-Fi (WoWLAN).
(TV menu) > Settings > Networks > Wired You can switch this TV on from your smartphone or or Wi-Fi > Connect to Network > Wired. tablet if the TV is in Standby. The setting Switch On with Wi-Fi (WoWLAN) must be switched on. 1 - Connect the router to the TV with a network cable (Ethernet cable**). 2 - Make sure that the router is switched on. Switch on Wi-Fi connection 3 - The TV constantly searches for the network connection. (TV menu) > Settings > Networks > Wired 4 - A message will be shown when the connection is or Wi-Fi > Wi-Fi On/Off. successful. You can switch on or off Wi-Fi connection on your If the connection fails, you can check the DHCP TV. setting of the router. DHCP should be switched on. **To fulfill EMC regulations, use a shielded FTP Cat. Digital Media Renderer - DMR 5E Ethernet cable. (TV menu) > Settings > Networks > Wired or Wi-Fi > Digital Media Renderer - DMR. If your media files do not play on your TV, make sure that the Digitial Media Renderer is switched on. As a factory setting, DMR is switched on.
TV Network Name
34 (TV menu) > Settings > Networks > Wired or Wi-Fi > TV Network Name. Android Settings If you have more than one TV in your home network, You can set or view several Android specific settings you can give the TV a unique name. or information. You can find the list of apps installed on your TV and the storage space they need. You can set the language you like to use with Voice Clear Internet Memory Search. You can configure the onscreen keyboard or allow apps to use your location. Explore the different (TV menu) > Settings > Networks > Wired Android settings. You can go or Wi-Fi > Clear Internet Memory. to www.support.google.com/androidtv for more With Clear Internet Memory you clear your Philips information on these settings. server registration and parental rating settings, your To open these settings… video store app logins, all Philips App Gallery favourites, Internet bookmarks and history. Interactive 1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK. MHEG applications can also save so-called 'cookies', 2 - Select Android Settings, and press OK. on your TV. These files will also be cleared. 3 - Explore the different Android settings. 4 - Press BACK if necessary, to close the menu.
7.3 7.2 Google Account Philips App Gallery
Sign In Philips Apps Connect the TV to the Internet to enjoy apps selected To enjoy the full capabilities of your Philips Android by Philips. The Philips App Gallery apps are made TV, you can sign in to Google with your Google specially for TV. Downloading and installing App Account. Gallery apps is free of charge. By signing in you'll be able to play your favourite The Philips App Gallery collection of apps can differ games across phone, tablet and TV. You'll also get per country or region. customised video and music recommendations on your TV home screen as well as access to YouTube, Google Play and other apps. Terms of Use Sign In Use your existing Google Account to sign in to To install and use the Philips App Gallery apps, you Google on your TV. A Google Account consists of an must agree to the Terms of Use. If you did not agree email address and a password. If you don't have an to these terms during the first TV installation, you can Google Account yet, use your computer or tablet to always agree to them later. The moment you agree to create one (accounts.google.com). To play games the Terms of Use, some apps will be available with Google Play, you need a Google+ profile. If you immediately and you can browse the Philips App did not sign in during the first TV installation, you can Gallery to install other apps. always sign in later. To agree on the Terms of Use after you did the TV To sign in after you did the TV installation… installation… 1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK. 1 - Press HOME and select Philips Collection > 2 - Select Android Settings and press OK. App Gallery and press OK to open the App Gallery. 3 - Press (down) and select Personal > Add 2 - You can select Terms of Use, then press OK to account and press OK. read. 4 - Press OK on SIGN IN. 3 - Select Accept and press OK. You cannot undo 5 - With the on-screen keyboard, enter your email this approval. address and press OK. 4 - Press BACK to close the menu. 6 - Enter your password and press the same small OK key to sign in. 7 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close the menu. If you want to sign in with another Google Account, first sign out and sign in with the other account.
35 Privacy Settings
You can set some privacy settings for the Philips App Gallery apps. • You can allow technical statistics to be send to Philips. • You can allow personal recommendations. • You can allow cookies. • You can switch on the Child Lock for 18+ rated apps. To set the Philips App Gallery privacy settings… 1 - Press HOME and select Philips Collection > App Gallery and press OK to open the App Gallery. 2 - You can select Privacy Policy, then press OK. 3 - Select each setting and press OK to allow or disallow. You can read about each setting in detail. 4 - Press BACK to close the menu.
36 8 repeatedly or press EXIT. Some Google Play products and features aren't Apps available in all countries. Find more information on 8.1 support.google.com/androidtv About Apps
You can find all installed apps in Music the Apps section of the Home menu. Like apps on your smartphone or tablet, the apps on With Google Play Music, you can play your favourite your TV offer specific functions for an enriched TV music on TV. experience. Apps like YouTube, games, video stores With Google Play Music you can buy new music on or weather forecasts (a.o.). You can use the Internet your computer or mobile device. Or, on your TV, you app to surf the Internet. can sign up for All Access, the Google Play Music Apps can come from the Philips App Gallery or subscription. Alternatively, you can play the music the Google Play™ Store . To get you started, some you already own, stored on your computer. practical apps are pre-installed on your TV. What You Need To install apps from the Philips App Gallery or the • your TV must be connected with the Internet Google Play Store, the TV must be connected to the • you must sign in with your Google Account on TV Internet. You must agree to the Terms of Use to use • add a credit card to your Google Account to take a apps from the App Gallery. You must sign in with a music subscription Google Account to use the Google Play apps and To start Google Play Music… Google Play Store. 1 - Press HOME. 2 - Scroll down and select Apps > Google Play 8.2 Music and press OK. 3 - Select the music you want and press OK. Google Play 4 - To stop the Music app, press BACK repeatedly or press EXIT. Movies and TV Some Google Play products and features aren't available in all countries. With Google Play Movies & TV, you can rent or buy movies and TV shows to watch on TV. Find more information on support.google.com/androidtv What You Need • your TV must be connected with the Internet • you must sign in with your Google Account on TV • add a credit card to your Google Account to Games purchase movies and TV shows With Google Play Games, you can play games on TV. To rent or buy a movie or TV show… Online or offline. 1 - Press HOME. You can see what your friends are playing currently or 2 - Scroll down and select Apps > Google Play you can join the game and compete. You can track Movies & TV and press OK. your achievements or start wherever you left off. 3 - Select a movie or TV show and press OK. 4 - Select the purchase you want and press OK. You What You Need will be taken through the purchase procedure. • your TV must be connected with the Internet • you must sign in with your Google Account on TV To watch a rented or bought movie or TV show… • add a credit card to your Google Account to 1 - Press HOME. purchase new games 2 - Scroll down and select Apps > Google Play Start the Google Play Games app to select and install Movies & TV and press OK. new game apps on your TV. Some games are free of 3 - Select the movie or TV show from your library in charge. A message appears if a particular game needs the app, select the titel and press OK. a gamepad to play the game. 4 - You can use the (stop), (pause), (rewind) or (fast To start or stop a Google Play Game… forward) keys on the remote control. 1 - Press HOME. 5 - To stop the Movies & TV app, press BACK 2 - Scroll down and select Apps > Google Play
37 Games and press OK. 3 - Select a game to play or select a new game to Payments install and press OK. To make a payment on Google Play on TV, you must 4 - When done, press BACK repeatedly or add a form of payment - a credit card (outside the press EXIT or stop the app with its dedicated United States) - to your Google Account. When you exit/stop button. purchase a movie or TV show, you will be charged on The games you install will also appear in the row of this credit card. Games in the Home menu To add a credit card … Some Google Play products and features aren't 1 - On your computer, go to accounts.google.com available in all countries. and sign in with the Google Account you will use with Find more information on Google Play on TV. support.google.com/androidtv 2 - Go to wallet.google.com to add a card to your Google Account. 3 - Enter your credit card data and accept the terms Google Play Store and conditions.
From the Google Play Store you can download and install new apps. Some apps are free of charge. 8.3
What You Need App Gallery • your TV must be connected with the Internet Connect the TV to the Internet to enjoy apps selected • you must sign in with your Google Account on TV by Philips. These apps are made specially for • add a credit card to your Google Account to TV. The Philips App Gallery offers a wide diversity purchase apps of apps. For some countries, you can install apps of a To install a new app… local Videostore or apps from TV broadcasters in your 1 - Press HOME. country. The latter can offer Catch-Up TV services. 2 - Scroll down and select Apps > Google Play Downloading and installing App Gallery apps is free Store and press OK. of charge. 3 - Select the app you want to install and press OK. The Philips App Gallery collection of apps can differ 4 - To close the Google Play Store, press BACK per country or region. repeatedly or press EXIT. Some App Gallery apps are pre-installed on your TV. Parental controls To install other apps from the App Gallery, you will be In the Google Play Store, you can hide apps asked to agree to the Terms of Use. You can set the according to users/buyers maturity. You need to enter Privacy Settings according to your preference. a PIN code to select or change the level of maturity. To install an app from the App Gallery… To set the parental control… 1 - Press HOME. 1 - Press HOME. 2 - Scroll down and select Philips Collection > 2 - Scroll down and select Apps > Google Play App Gallery and press OK. Store and press OK. 3 - Select an app icon and press OK. 3 - Select Settings > Parental controls and 4 - Select Install and press OK. press OK. 4 - Select the level of maturity you want. 5 - On request, enter the PIN code. 8.4 6 - To close the Google Play Store, press BACK repeatedly or press EXIT. Start or Stop an App Some Google Play products and features aren't You can start an app from the Home menu. available in all countries. To start an app… Find more information 1 - Press HOME. on support.google.com/androidtv 2 - Scroll down to Apps and select the app you want and press OK. 3 - To stop an app, press BACK or press EXIT or stop the app with its dedicated exit/stop button.
38 8.5 • Purchase through Google Play Movies & TV, nor Google Play Games Lock Apps • Use third-party apps that don't use the Google sign- in About App Locks With the TV switched to a restricted profile you can… You can lock apps unsuited for children. You can lock • Watch content already rented or purchased from 18+ rated apps from the App Gallery or set up a Google Play Movies & TV restricted profile in the Home menu. • Play games already purchased and installed from Google Play Games 18+ • Access the following settings: Wi-Fi network, Speech The 18+ app lock will ask for a PIN code when you try and Accessibility to start an 18+ rated app. This lock is only valid for 18+ • Add Bluetooth accessories rated apps from the Philips App Gallery. The Google Account on TV will stay logged in. Using a restricted profile doesn't change the Google Account. Restricted profile You can set up a restructed profile for the Home menu where only the apps you allow are available. Set Up You need to enter a PIN code to set up and switch on the restricted profile. To set up the restricted profile… Google Play Store - Maturity 1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK. 2 - Select Android Settings and press OK. In the Google Play Store, you can hide apps 3 - Press (down) and select Personal > Security & according to users/buyers maturity. You need to enter restrictions and press OK. a PIN code to select or change the level of maturity. 4 - Select Restricted Profile and press OK. The level of maturity will determine which apps are 5 - Select Settings and press OK. available for instalation. 6 - Enter a PIN code with the remote control. 7 - Select Allowed apps and press OK. 8 - In the list of available apps, select an app and Lock 18+ rated apps press OK to allow or not allow this app. 9 - Press BACK to go back one step or press You can lock 18+ rated apps from the Philips App EXIT to close the menu. Gallery. This setting controls the 18+ setting in the Now you can enter the restricted profile. Philips App Gallery Privacy Settings. With the PIN code, you can always change the PIN To lock 18+ rated apps… code or edit the list of allowed or not allowed apps. 1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK. 2 - Select Child Lock, select App Lock and press OK. 3 - Select On and press OK. Enter 4 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close the menu. To enter (switch to) the restricted profile… For more information, in Help, press the colour 1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK. key Keywords and look up Child Lock, App 2 - Select Android Settings and press OK. Lock for more information. 3 - Press (down) and select Personal > Security & restrictions and press OK. 4 - Select Enter restricted profile and press OK. Restricted Profile 5 - Enter a PIN code with the remote control. 6 - Press BACK to go back one step or About Restricted Profile press EXIT to close the menu. You can restrict the use of certain apps by switching You can see when a restricted profile is entered if an the TV to a restricted profile. The Home menu will icon appears in the Home screen. Scroll down only show the apps you allowed. You need a PIN to Settings and scroll to the far right. code to switch out of the restricted profile. With the TV switched to a restricted profile you cannot… • Find or open apps which are marked as Not allowed • Access the Google Play Store
39
Exit
To exit the restricted profile…
1 - Press HOME, scroll down to Settings and scroll far right. 2 - Select Restricted Profile and press OK. 3 - Select Exit restricted profile and press OK. 4 - Enter the PIN code. The TV will exit the restricted profile.
8.6 Manage Apps
If you stop an app and return to the Home menu, the app is not really stopped. The app is still running in the background to be readily available when you start it again. To run fluently, most apps need to save some data in the cache memory of the TV. It might be good to stop an app completely or clear the cache data of a particular app to optimise the overall performance of apps and to keep memory usage low on your Android TV. Also, it is best to uninstall apps that you are not using anymore.
8.7 Storage
You can see how much storage space - the internal TV memory - you are using for your apps, videos, music, etc. You can see how much free space you still have available for installing new apps. Check your storage if apps start to run slow or in case of app trouble. To see how much storage you are using… 1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK. 2 - Select Android Settings and press OK. 3 - Select Device > Storage & reset and press OK. 4 - View the storage usage of the TV memory. 5 - Press BACK to go back one step or press EXIT to close the menu. USB Hard Drive If you connect a USB Hard Drive, you can use the drive to extent the TV memory to store more apps. Allow the USB Hard Drive to be used as an additional TV memory during the formatting process. The TV will try to store new apps on the USB Hard Drive first. Some apps do not allow to be stored on a USB Hard Drive. To migrate your existing data, go to All Settings > Android Settings > Device> Storage & reset and select the USB Hard Drive.
40 9 Internet
9.1 Start Internet
You can browse the Internet on your TV. You can view any Internet website but most of them are not prepared for a TV screen. • Some plug-ins (e.g. to view pages or videos) are not available on your TV. • You cannot send or download files. • Internet pages are shown one page at a time and full screen. To start the Internet browser… 1 - Press HOME. 2 - Scroll down and select Apps > Internet and press OK. 3 - Enter an Internet address and select , press OK. 4 - To close Internet, press HOME or EXIT.
9.2 Options on Internet
Some extras are available for the Internet. To open the extras… 1 - With the website open, press OPTIONS. 2 - Select one of the items and press OK. • Add to speed dial: To enter a new Internet address. • Add to bookmarks: Add the page as bookmark • Page security: To view the security level of the current page. • New private tab: Open new private tab, and have private browsing • Settings: Settings for Zoom, Text size, Accessibility mode, Always show menu bar, and clear (browsing) history • Help: Internet browser information • Exit Internet browser: Close Internet browser
41 10 TV Menu
10.1 About TV Menu
If the TV cannot be connected with the Internet, you can use the TV Menu as your Home menu. In the TV Menu, you will find every TV function.
10.2 Open TV Menu
To open TV Menu and open an item… 1 - Press to open TV Menu. 2 - Select an item and press OK to open or start it. 3 - Press BACK to close TV Menu without starting anything.
42 11 11.3 Sources Device Name and Type When you connect a new device to the TV and the TV 11.1 detects the device, you can assign an icon that fits the Switch to a device device type. If you connect a device with an HDMI cable and HDMI CEC, the TV detects the device type From the list of Sources, you can switch to any of the automatically and the device gets an appropriate connected devices. You can switch to a tuner to icon. watch TV, open the content of a connected USB Flash The device type determines picture and sound styles, Drive or see the recordings you made on a connected resolution values, specific settings or the position USB Hard Drive. You can switch to your connected within the Sources menu. You don't have to worry devices to watch their programme, a digital receiver or about the ideal settings. a Blu-ray Disc player. Rename or Change Type To switch to a connected device… You can always change the name or change the type 1 - Press SOURCES to open the Sources menu. of a connected device. Look for the icon at the 2 - Select one of the item in the source list and right of the device name in the Sources menu. Some press OK. The TV will show the programme or TV input sources do not allow a name change. content of the device. 3 - Press SOURCES again to close the menu. To change the device type… One Touch Play 1 - Select the device in the Sources menu. With the TV in standby, you can switch on a disc 2 - Press (right) to select the icon and player with your TV remote control. press OK. To switch on both disc player and TV from standby 3 - Press BACK to hide the on-screen keyboard. and start playing the disc immediately, 4 - Press (down) to find all available device types. Select the type you want and press OK. press (play) on the TV remote control. The device must be connected with an HDMI cable and both TV and device must have HDMI CEC switched on. 5 - If you want to reset the type of the device to the original connector type, select Reset and press OK. 6 - Select Close and press OK to close this menu. 11.2 To change the device name… Options for a TV Input 1 - Select the device in the Sources menu. 2 - Press (right) to select the icon and Some TV input devices offer specific settings. press OK. 3 - Use the on-screen Keyboard to delete the To set the options for a specific TV input… current name and enter a new one. Press to 1 - Press SOURCES. confirm. 2 - Select the TV input in the list and press OK. 4 - Press BACK to hide the on-screen keyboard. 3 - Press OPTIONS. You can set the options for 5 - If you want to reset the name of the device to the the selected TV input here. original connector name, select Reset and 4 - Press OPTIONS again to close the Options press OK. menu. 6 - Select Close and press OK to close this menu. Possible options…
Controls 11.4 With this option you can operate the connected Rescan Connections device with the TV remote control. The device must be connected with an HDMI cable and both TV and You can rescan all TV connections to update the device must have HDMI CEC switched on. Sources menu with recently connected devices. Device Info To rescan the connections… Open this option to view information on the 1 - Press SOURCES to open the Sources menu. connected device. 2 - Press (up) to select the icon at the top right of the Sources menu. 3 - Press OK to start scanning the connections. Newly connected devices will be added to the
43 Sources menu.
44 12 Remove a Device Networks For more information, in Help, press the colour key Keywords and look up Bluetooth, Remove 12.1 device for more information on how to unpair Network (remove) a wireless Bluetooth device.
For more information, in Help, press the colour key Keywords and look up Network, for more Bluetooth On or Off information on connecting the TV to a network. To connect wireless Bluetooth devices, make sure Bluetooth is switched on. 12.2 To switch Bluetooth on… Bluetooth 1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK. 2 - Select Wireless and Networks and press OK. What You Need 3 - Select Bluetooth > Bluetooth On/Off and press OK. You can connect a wireless device with Bluetooth® to 4 - Select On or Off and press OK. this TV. 5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close the menu. To play the TV sound on a wireless speaker, you must pair the wireless speaker with the TV. The TV can only play the sound on one speaker at a time.
Attention - Audio to Video syncronisation Many Bluetooth speaker systems have a high, so called, 'latency'. High latency means that the audio lags behind the video, causing unsynchronised 'lip sync'. Before you purchase a wireless Bluetooth speaker system, inform yourself about the newest models and look for a device with a low latency rating. Ask your dealer for advice.
Pairing a Device
For more information, in Help, press the colour key Keywords and look up Bluetooth, Pairing for more information on pairing wireless devices.
Select a Device
For more information, in Help, press the colour key Keywords and look up Bluetooth, Select device for more information on how to select a wireless speaker.
45 13 Press the arrows (up) or (down) to adjust the colour saturation value of the picture. Settings
13.1 Adjust the picture contrast Picture (TV menu) > Settings > Picture > Contrast. Press the arrows (up) or (down) to adjust the Picture Settings contrast value of the picture. You can decrease contrast value to reduce power Picture Style consumption.
Select a style (TV menu) > Settings > Picture > Picture Adjust the picture sharpness style. (TV For easy picture adjustment, you can select a preset menu) > Settings > Picture > Sharpness. picture style. Press the arrows (up) or (down) to adjust the • Personal - The picture preferences you set during sharpness value of the picture. the first start up. • Vivid - Ideal for daylight viewing • Natural - Natural picture settings Adjust brightness • Standard - Most energy conscious setting - (TV Factory setting menu) > Settings > Picture > Brightness. • Movie - Ideal for watching movies • Game - Ideal for playing games Press the arrows (up) or (down) to set the • Monitor - Ideal for PC display level of brightness of the picture signal. • Day - For ISF Calibration Note: Setting of brightness much away from • Night - For ISF Calibration reference value (50) may result lower contrast. When TV receives HDR signal, select a picture style below: • HDR Personal Advanced Picture Settings • HDR Vivid • HDR Natural Colour Settings • HDR Movie • HDR Game Advanced Colour Settings • Day - For ISF Calibration (TV • Night - For ISF Calibration menu) > Settings Restore a Style > Picture > Advanced > Colour. 1 - Select the picture style you want to restore. 2 - Press the colour key Restore style, and press OK. The style is restored. Adjust the colour enhancement (TV Customise a Style menu) > Settings > Picture > Advanced > Colour > Colou Any picture setting you adjust, like Colour or Contrast, r enhancement. is stored in the currently selected Picture Style. It Select Maximum, Medium, or Minimum to set the allows you to customise each style. level of the colour intensity and the details in bright Only the style Personal can save its settings for colours. each source in the Sources menu.
Select the preset colour temperature Colour, Contrast, Sharpness, Brightness (TV Adjust the picture colour menu) > Settings > Picture > Advanced > Colour > Colour temp (TV menu) > Settings > Picture > Colour. erature.
46 Select Normal, Warm, or Cool to set the colour Select Red, Green, or Blue to switch picture as temperature for your preference. selected colour only, or select Off to turn off RGB mode.
Customise colour temperature (TV menu) > Settings Advanced Contrast Settings > Picture > Advanced > Colour > Custom Colo ur temperature. Contrast Modes
Select Custom in Colour temperature menu (TV to customise a colour temperature yourself. Press menu) > the arrows (up) or (down) to adjust the Settings > Picture > Advanced > Contrast > Cont value. WP is white point and BL is black level. You rast mode. can also select one of the presets in this menu. Select Normal, Optimized for picture, or Optimized for energy savings to set the TV automatically reduces the contrast, for best power consumption or ISF Colour Settings for best picture experience, or select Off to switch off the adjustment. About ISF Get the most out of your TV display with ISF® Calibration. Ask a ISF calibration expert to come to HDR Settings your home and set the TV to the most optimal picture setting. If you are watching HDR programmes - programmes Ask your dealer for an ISF Calibration. recorded in HDR - there is no need to upscale to HDR Calibration benefits are… and the HDR setting is unavailable. The TV can play HDR programmes from a HDMI connection, from an • better picture clarity and sharpness Internet source or from a connected USB memory • better detail in bright and dark parts device. • deeper and darker blacks • better colour purity and quality If you are watching HDR (High-Dynamic • optmise the picture viewing effect in your home for Range) programmes - programmes recorded in HDR both daylight and night conditions - The TV will automatically switched to HDR mode with indication. The ISF Calibration expert stores and locks the ISF settings as two picture styles. HDR Upscaling control is unavailable. The TV can play HDR programmes* from HDMI 1 or HDMI When the ISF Calibration is done, press (TV 2 connection, broadcasting, from an Internet source menu) > Settings > Picture > Picture or from a connected USB memory device. Style > Day or Night. Select Day to watch TV during bright light conditions or * Only HDR10 and Hybrid Log Gamma HDR are select Night when it's dark. supported
Colour control (Hue, Saturation and Intensity) HDR Upscalling, High Brightness and HDR Conversion (TV menu) > Settings (TV > Picture > Advanced > Colour > Colour menu) > control. Settings > Picture > Advanced > Contrast > HDR upscalling / High Brightness / HDR Conversion. Press the arrows (up) or (down) to adjust the value of Hue, Saturation and Intensity, or Select On to boost the brightness and contrast of select Reset all to reset all value to default. the picture. The picture is much brighter and has a higher level of contrast between lighter and darker parts. HDR upscaling keeps colours rich and RGB only mode saturated. Set the level of HDR Conversion or see the demo on live video. (TV menu) > Note: Settings > Picture > Advanced > Colour > RGB • Available when SDR (Standard Dynamic Range) only mode. signal is detected.
47 • Not available when video content is supported HDR. automatically to the lighting conditions of the room.
Advanced Sharpness Settings
HDR Plus Ultra Resolution (TV (TV menu) > menu) > Settings > Picture > Advanced > Contrast > HDR Settings > Picture > Advanced > Sharpness > Ult plus. ra Resolution. Select HDR Plus for superior contrast and brightness Select On to have a superior sharpness in line edges effect. and details. Note: Available when HDR (High-Dynamic Range) signal is detected. Picture Clean
Noise reduction Dynamic Contrast (TV (TV menu) > menu) > Settings > Picture > Advanced > Picture Settings > Picture > Advanced > Contrast > Dy clean > Noise reduction. namic contrast. Select Maximum, Medium, or Minimum to set the Select Maximum, Medium, or Minimum to set the level for removing the noise in video content. level at which the TV automatically enhances the Noise is mostly visible as small moving dots in on- details in the dark, middle and light areas of the screen picture. picture.
MPEG Artefact Reduction Video Contrast, Gamma (TV menu) > Video contrast Settings > Picture > Advanced > Picture (TV clean > MPEG Artefact Reduction. menu) > Select Maximum, Medium, or Minimum to have Settings > Picture > Advanced > Contrast > Vide different degress of smoothing the artefects in digital o contrast. video content. Press the arrows (up) or (down) to adjust the MPEG artefacts are mostly visible as small blocks or video contrast level. jagged edges in on-screen images.
Gamma Motion Settings (TV Natural Motion menu) > Settings > Picture > Advanced > Contrast > Gam Natural Motion ma. (TV Press the arrows (up) or (down) to set a non- menu) > linear setting for picture luminance and contrast. Settings > Picture > Advanced > Motion > Natur al Motion.
Light Sensor Natural Motion makes any movement smooth and fluent. (TV Select Maximum, Medium, or Minimum to have menu) > different degress for reducing the motion judder, Settings > Picture > Advanced > Contrast > Ligh visible in movies on TV. t sensor. Select Minimum or Off when noise appears in Select On to adjust the picture settings playing moving picture on-screen.
48 Note: Only available when Motion styles set started with. to Personal.
Perfect Clear Motion Quick Picture Setting (TV menu) > During the first installation, you did some picture Settings > Picture > Advanced > Motion > Perfe settings in a few easy steps. You can redo these steps ct Clear Motion. with Quick Picture Setting. To do these steps, make sure the TV can tune to a TV channel or can show a Perfect Clear Motion makes any movement smooth programme from a connected device. and fluent. To set the picture in a few easy steps… Select Maximum, Medium, or Minimum to have different degress for reducing the motion judder, 1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK. visible in movies on TV. 2 - Select Picture and press (right) to enter the Select Minimum or Off when noise appears in menu. playing moving picture on-screen. 3 - Select Quick Picture Setting, and press OK. 4 - Use the navigation keys to select your choice. Note: Only available when Motion styles set 5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close to Personal. the menu.
Picture Format 13.2
If the picture is not filling the whole screen, if black Sound bars are showing on the top or bottom or at both sides, you can adjust the picture to fill the screen Sound Style completely. Select a style To select one of the basic settings to fill the screen… (TV menu) > Settings > Sound > Sound 1 - While watching a TV channel, press . style. 2 - Select Picture Format > Fill Screen, Fit to Screen, Wide Screen and Original, and press OK. For easy sound adjustment, you can select a preset 3 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close setting with sound style. the menu. • Original - Most neutral sound setting • Fill Screen – automatically enlarges the picture to • Movie - Ideal for watching movies fill the screen. Picture distortion is minimal, subtitles • Music - Ideal for listening to music remain visible. Not suitable for PC input. Some • Game - Ideal for gaming extreme picture formats can still show black bars. • News - Ideal for speech • Fit to Screen – automatically zooms in the picture • Expert mode - Access to a more in depth sound to fill the screen without distortion. Black bars may be settings. visible. Not suitable for PC input. • Wide Screen – automatically zooms in the picture Restore a Style to wide screen. 1 - Select the sound style you want to restore. • Original – automatically zooms in the picture to 2 - Press the colour key Restore Style, and wide screen. press OK. The style is restored. To format the picture manually… 1 - While watching a TV channel, press . Expert mode settings 2 - Select Advanced and press OK. 3 - Use Shift, Zoom, and Stretch to adjust the DTS TruSurround picture. 4 - Or select Undo to return to the setting the (TV menu) > Settings > Sound > Expert picture had when you opened Picture Format. mode settings > DTS TruSurround. • Shift – Select on the arrows to shift the picture. You Press the arrows (up) or (down) to can only shift the picture when it is zoomed in. adjust the level of DTS TruSurround. • Zoom – Select on the arrows to zoom in. • Stretch – Select on the arrows to stretch the picture vertically or horizontally. DTS TruDialog • Undo – Select to return to the picture format you
49 (TV menu) > Settings > Sound > Expert • If you select TV Speakers, the TV speakers are mode settings > DTS TruDialog > On. always on. • If you selct Headphones, the sound will be played Select On to get an improved sound quality for through headphones. speech programme. With an audio device connected with HDMI CEC,
select HDMI sound system. The TV will switch off Equalizer the TV speakers when the device is playing the sound. (TV menu) > Settings > Sound > Expert mode settings > Equalizer. Press the arrows (up) or (down) to adjust the level of Equalizer. Digital Output Settings
Digital output settings are available for optical and TV placement HDMI ARC sound signals.
(TV menu) > Settings > Sound > TV Digital out format placement. (TV menu) > Select On a TV stand or On the wall to have best Settings > Sound > Advanced > Digital out sound reproduction according to the setting. format. Set the audio out signal of the TV to fit the sound Advanced Sound Settings capabilities of the connected Home Theatre System. • Stereo: If your audio playback devices have no Volume Control multichannel sound processing, select to only output stereo content to your audio playback devices. Auto volume • Multichannel: Select to only output 5.1 audio content (compressed multichannel sound signal) to your (TV audio playback devices. menu) > • Dolby Digital Plus: Select to output Dolby Digital Settings > Sound > Advanced > Auto volume. Plus or DTS content to your audio playback devices Select DTS TruVolume to deliver a robust consistent or Home theatre system. output. - Make sure your audio playback devices support Select Night Mode for a more comfortable quiet Dolby Atmos feature. listening experience. - SPDIF output (DIGITAL AUDIO OUT) will be disabled when streaming Dolby Digital Plus content. Delta volume (TV Digital out levelling menu) > (TV Settings > Sound > Advanced > Delta volume. menu) > Press the arrows (up) or (down) to adjust the Settings > Sound > Advanced > Digital out delta value for TV speaker volume. levelling. Adjust the loudness level from device which is connected to digital audio output (SPDIF) or HDMI. Audio Out Settings • Select More to have louder volume. (TV • Select Less to have softer volume. menu) > Settings > Sound > Advanced > Audio out. Set the TV to play the sound on TV or on the Digital out delay connected audio system. (TV You can select where you want to hear the TV sound menu) > and how you want to control it. Settings > Sound > Advanced > Digital out delay. • If you select TV Speakers Off, you permanently For some Home Theatre Systems you might need to switch off the TV speakers. adjust the audio sync delay to synchronise the audio
50 to the video. Select Off if a sound delay is set on Follow audio your Home Theatre System. (TV menu) > Settings > Ambilight > Ambilight Digital out offset (Only available when Digital out style > Follow audio. delay set to On) Select one of the styles that follow the dynamics of the sound. (TV menu) > • Lumina - Mixes audio dynamics with video colours Settings > Sound > Advanced > Digital out • Colora - Based on audio dynamics offset. • Retro - Based on audio dynamics • Spectrum - Based on audio dynamics If you cannot set a delay on the Home Theatre • Scanner - Based on audio dynamics System, you can set the TV to sync the sound. You • Rhytm - Based on audio dynamics can set an offset that compensates for the time • Party - A mix of all Follow Audio styles, one after necessary for the Home Theatre System to process the other the sound of the TV picture. You can set the value in steps of 5ms. Maximum setting is 60ms.
Follow colour (TV 13.3 menu) > Settings > Ambilight > Ambilight style > Follow colour. Ambilight Settings Select one of the preset colour styles. Turn Ambilight On or Off • Hot lava - Red colour variations • Deep water - Blue colour variations • Fresh nature - Green colour variations Turn off Ambilight • Warm white - Static colour Press AMBILIGHT and select Off, or you can • Cool white - Static colour turn Off by pressing (TV menu) > Settings > Ambilight > Ambilight style > Off. Follow app (TV menu) > Settings > Ambilight > Ambilight Ambilight Style style > Follow app.
You can select the way Ambilight follows. This function is available when you control Ambilight with an app. (TV menu) > Settings > Ambilight > Ambilight style. Ambilight Brightness, Saturation
Follow video Brightness (TV (TV menu) > Settings > Ambilight > Ambilight menu) > Settings > Ambilight > Brightness. style > Follow video. Press the arrows (up) or (down) to set the Select one of the styles that follow the dynamics of level of Ambilight brightness. the picture on your TV screen. • Standard - Ideal for day to day TV watching Saturation • Natural - Follows the picture or sound as truthful as possible (TV • Football - Ideal for football games menu) > Settings > Ambilight > Saturation. • Vivid - Ideal for daylight conditions Press the arrows (up) or (down) to set the • Game - Ideal for gaming level of Ambilight saturation. • Comfort - Ideal for a quiet evening • Relax - Ideal for a lounge feeling
51 Settings > Ambilight > Ambilight+hue > Reset Ambilight + Hue configuration.
Configure
(TV menu) > Settings > Ambilight > Ambilight+hue > Configure. Advanced Ambilight Settings Setup your Philips Hue bulbs to follow the colours of Neutralise the influence of a coloured wall on the Ambilight. Ambilight colours (TV menu) > Switch Off Settings > Ambilight > Advanced > Wall colour. Switch off Ambilight+hue Select the colour of the wall behind the TV and the TV will modify the Ambilight colours to appear as they (TV are intended. menu) > Settings > Ambilight > Ambilight+hue > Switch off. ISF Tuning (TV menu) > Immersion Settings > Ambilight > Advanced > ISF tuning. (TV menu) > Settings > Ambilight > Ambilight+hue > Immersio Set Ambilight to switch off immediately or slowly n. fade out when you switch off the TV Press the arrows (up) or (down) to adjust (TV how accurate the Hue bulbs follow the Ambilight. menu) > Settings > Ambilight > Advanced > TV switch off.
Lounge Light+hue
If you installed Ambilight+hue, you can let the hue 13.4 bulbs follow Lounge Light from Ambilight. The Philips hue lamps will expand the Lounge Light effect across Eco Settings the room. Set energy saving level Switch on/off the hue bulbs (TV menu) > Settings > Eco (TV settings > Energy saving. menu) > Settings > Ambilight > Ambilight+hue > Lounge Select Maximum, Medium, or Minimum to have light+hue. different degress for energy saving, or select Off to switch off energy saving mode.
View Configuration or Reset Set screen off to save energy consumption View current setup of the Ambilight+hue, network, (TV menu) > Settings > Eco Bridge and bulbs settings > Screen off. (TV Select Screen off, the TV screen is switched off, to menu) > switch the TV screen back on, press any key on the Settings > Ambilight > Ambilight+hue > View remote control. configuration.
Switch on built-in ambient light sensor Reset current setup of the Ambilight+hue (TV menu) > Settings > Eco (TV settings > Light sensor. menu) >
52 Select Light sensor, the built-in ambient light sensor another USB device to the other USB ports when lowers the brightness of the TV screen when the formatting. surrounding light darkens. The built-in light sensor 2 - Switch on the USB Hard Drive and the TV. automatically adjusts the picture, to the lighting 3 - Select Recordings if you want to perform Pause conditions of the room. TV and Recordings, otherwise, select Apps to store apps. Follow the instructions on screen.
4 - All files and data will be removed after formatting. Set TV switch off timer 5 - When the USB Hard Drive is formatted, leave it connected permanently. (TV menu) > Settings > Eco settings > Switch off timer. Press the arrows (up) or (down) to adjust the value. The value 0 (Off) deactivates the automatic USB Keyboard Settings switch off. Set the keyboard layout for installed USB keyboard Select Switch off timer, the TV switches off automatically to save energy. (TV menu) > Settings > General * TV switches off if receiving a TV signal but you don't settings > USB keyboard settings. press a key on the remote control during a 4 hour period. Connect the USB keyboard to one of the USB connections on this TV. When the TV detects the * TV switches off if not receivING a TV signal nor a keyboard for the first time, you can select your remote control command for 10 minutes. keyboard lay-out and test your selection. * If you use the TV as a monitor or use a digital receiver to watch TV (a Set-Top Box - STB) and you do not use the remote control of the TV, you should deactivate this automatic switch off, to set the value Home or Shop to 0. Select the location of your TV (TV menu) > Settings > General 13.5 settings > Location. General Settings Select Shop, the picture style is switched back to Vivid, and can adjust shop settings. USB Hard Drive Shop mode is for in-store promotion.
You need to set up and format a USB Hard Drive before you record a channel. (TV menu) > Settings > General settings > USB Hard Drive. Shop Setup Before you can pause or record a broadcast, or store apps, you must connect and format a USB Hard Adjust shop settings Drive. Formatting removes all files from the USB Hard Drive. If you want to record broadcasts with TV Guide (TV menu) > Settings > General data from the Internet, you must setup the Internet settings > Shop setup. connection first before you install the USB Hard Drive. If the TV is set to Shop, you can set the availablility of Warning a specific demo for in store use. The USB Hard Drive is formatted exclusively for this TV, you cannot use the stored recordings on another Adjust Picture and audio TV or PC. Do not copy or change recording files on the USB Hard Drive with any PC application. This will (TV menu) > Settings > General corrupt your recordings. When you format another settings > Shop setup > Picture and audio. USB Hard Drive, the content on the former will be lost. Select Optimized for shop or custom for picture and A USB Hard Drive installed on your TV will need audio settings. reformatting for use with a computer.
To format a USB Hard Drive… Set Logos and banner 1 - Connect the USB Hard Drive to one of the USB connections on the TV. Do not connect (TV menu) > Settings > General
53 settings > Shop setup > Logos and banner. HDMI Ultra HD Set to display Feature logos and Promotional banner. Connect the HDMI device and play Ultra HD signal on your TV, might not work correctly or show distorted Demo Me autostart and Ambilight Demo autostart picture or sound. To avoid the malfunctioning of such a device, you can set the signal quality to a level the (TV menu) > Settings > General device can handle. settings > Shop setup > Demo Me autostart / Ambilight Demo autostart. Set the signal quality for each HDMI connectors Turn On/Off the Demo Me or Ambilight Demo (TV menu) > Settings > General autostart. settings > HDMI Ultra HD > HDMI 1&2 > UHD 4:2:0, UHD 4:4:4/4:2:2. The setting UHD 4:4:4/4:2:2 allows UHD YCbCr 4:4:4 EasyLink - HDMI CEC / 4:2:2 signals. The setting UHD 4:2:0 allows UHD YCbCr 4:2:0 signals. Connect HDMI CEC-compatible devices to your TV, you can operate them with the TV remote control. EasyLink HDMI CEC must be switched on on the TV If the device is not using Ultra HD signals, you can and the connected device. switch off Ultra HD for this HDMI connection.
Switch on EasyLink Set the signal quality for each HDMI connectors (TV menu) > Settings > General (TV menu) > Settings > General settings > EasyLink > EasyLink > On. settings > HDMI Ultra HD > HDMI 1&2 > UHD Off.
Operate HDMI CEC-compatible devices with TV remote control Advanced (TV menu) > Settings > General settings > EasyLink > EasyLink remote TV Guide control > On. The TV Guide receives information (data) from
broadcasters or from the Internet. The TV can collect Note: TV Guide information for the channels that are installed on the TV. • EasyLink might not work with devices from other brands. Select where the TV guide data receives from • The HDMI CEC functionality has different names on different brands. Some examples are: Anynet, Aquos (TV menu) > Settings > General Link, Bravia Theatre Sync, Kuro Link, Simplink and settings > Advanced > TV guide. Viera Link. Not all brands are fully compatible with EasyLink. Example HDMI CEC branding names are Note: property of their respective owners. • In some regions and for some channels, TV guide information might not be available. • The TV cannot collect the TV guide information from HDMI Auto game mode channels viewed from a digital receiver or decoder. Set the HDMI Auto game mode
(TV menu) > Settings > General settings > Channel Logos HDMI Auto game mode. Set HDMI Auto game mode to On, if you want TV to Switch off channel logos automatically set Picture style to Game whenever it is (TV menu) > Settings > General informed by the HDMI device connected to TV. settings > Advanced > Channel logos.
54 Redo full TV installation , and set TV status back to HbbTV Settings - Hybrid Broadcast Broadband TV the first time you switch on Switch on HbbTV (TV menu) > Settings > General (TV menu) > Settings > General settings > Reinstall TV. settings > Advanced > HbbTV settings > HbbTV Enter PIN code and select Yes, the TV will reinstall > On. completely. Switch off HbbTV History Tracking All settings will be reset and installed channels will be replaced. (TV menu) > Settings > General settings > Advanced > HbbTV settings > HbbTV The installation can take a few minute tracking > Off.
Remove HbbTV Cookies 13.6 (TV menu) > Settings > General settings > Advanced > HbbTV settings > HbbTV Clock, Region, and Language cookies > On. Settings
Language Viewing data (TV menu) > Settings > Region and This takes you to the Viewing Data settings where you language > Language. can enable or disable the collection of your viewing data by Inscape Data, Inc. (Inscape) and provides access to the Inscape's Privacy Policy that explains Change the language of the TV menu and how Viewing Data is collected (if you enable messages collection) and used. (TV menu) > Settings > Region and Turn on or off Viewing data language > Language > Menu language. (TV menu) > Settings > General settings > Viewing data > Viewing data settings. Set audio preference language This is where you can enable or disable the collection of your viewing data by Inscape Data, Inc. (TV menu) > Settings > Region and language > Language > Primary audio, Secondary Note: audio. • In some regions and for some TV sets, Viewing data Digital TV channels can broadcast audio with several might not be available. spoken languages for a programme. You can set a • Viewing data using Inscape's automated content preferred primary and secondary audio language. If recognition (ACR) technology. For more information audio in one of these languages is available, the TV about the ACR Feature and data collected please will switch to this audio. refer to the Inscape Privacy Policy.
Set subtitle preference language CAM Profile Name (TV menu) > Settings > Region and language > Language > Primary Set profile name for installed CI+/CAM subtitle, Secondary subtitle. (TV menu) > Settings > General Digital channels can offer several subtitle languages settings > CAM profile name. for a programme. You can set a preferred primary and secondary subtitle language. If subtitles in one of these languages are available, the TV will show the Reset TV Settings and Reinstall TV subtitles you selected.
Reset all settings value to original TV settings Set teletex preference language (TV menu) > Settings > General settings > Factory settings. (TV menu) > Settings > Region and language > Language > Primary text, Secondary
text.
55 Some digital TV broadcasters have several Text 13.7 languages available. Android Settings
(TV menu) > Settings > Android settings. Clock View the list of installed Apps, check out the free (TV menu) > Settings > Region and space to download more or uninstall an App. language > Clock.
13.8 Correct clock automatically Universal Access Settings (TV menu) > Settings > Region and language > Clock > Auto clock mode. (TV menu) > Settings > Universal access. • The standard setting for the TV clock is Automatic. With Universal Access switched on, the TV is The time information comes from the broadcasted prepared for use for the deaf, hard of hearing, blind or UTC - Coordinated Universal Time information. partially sighted people. • If the clock is not correct, you can set the TV clock to Country dependent. Switch on universal access settings
(TV menu) > Settings > Universal Correct clock manually access > Universal access > On. (TV menu) > Settings > Region and language > Clock > Auto clock mode > Manual. Universal access for hearing impaired people (TV menu) > Settings > Region and language > Clock > Date, Time. (TV menu) > Settings > Universal access > Hearing impaired > On. Go to previous menu, and select Date and Time to adjust the value. • Some digital TV channels broadcast special audio and subtitles adapted for the hard of hearing or deaf Note: people. • If none of the automatic settings display the time • Switched on, the TV automatically switches to the correctly, you can set the time manually. adapted audio and subtitles, if available. • If you schedule recordings from the TV Guide, we recommend not to change the time and date manually. Universal access for blind or partially sighted people (TV menu) > Settings > Universal Set time zone or set a time offset for your region access > Audio description > Audio description > (TV menu) > Settings > Region and On. language > Clock > Time zone. Digital TV channels can broadcast special audio commentary describing what is happening on screen. Set the TV to switch to Standby automatically after a preset time (TV menu) > Settings > Universal access > Audio description > Mixed volume, Audio (TV menu) > Settings > Region and effects, Speech. language > Clock > Sleep timer. • Select Mixed volume, you can mix the volume of the normal audio with the audio commentary. Press the arrows (up) or (down) to adjust the value. Remote Control Keyboard • Set Audio effect to On for extra audio effects in the commentary audio, like stereo or fading sound. (TV menu) > Settings > Region and • Select Speech to set speech language > Remote control keyboard preference, Descriptive or Subtitles. To set the keyboard layout to Qwerty or Azerty.
56 13.9 Lock for CAM Lock Settings Set CAM PIN for recording Set Code and Change Code (TV menu) > Settings > Child lock > CAM PIN. Set new code or reset change code (TV menu) > Settings > Child lock > Set code, Change code. The child lock code is used to lock or unlock channels or programmes. Note: If you forgot your PIN code, you can override the current code use 8888 and enter a new code.
Lock for Programme
Set a minumum age to watch rated programmes (TV menu) > Settings > Child lock > Parental rating.
Lock for App
Set lock on App Gallery apps (TV menu) > Settings > Child lock > App lock. You can lock apps unsuited for children. You can lock 18+ rated apps from the App Gallery or set up a restricted profile in the Home menu.
18+ The 18+ app lock will ask for a PIN code when you try to start an 18+ rated app. This lock is only valid for 18+ rated apps from the Philips App Gallery.
Restricted profile You can set up a restructed profile for the Home menu where only the apps you allow are available. You need to enter a PIN code to set up and switch on the restricted profile.
Google Play Store - Maturity In the Google Play Store, you can hide apps according to users/buyers maturity. You need to enter a PIN code to select or change the level of maturity. The level of maturity will determine which apps are available for instalation.
57 14 14.3 Videos, Photos and Most Popular Menu and Last Played Menu Music View most popular files or clear the list 14.1 1 - Press SOURCES, select USB and press OK. From a Computer or NAS 2 - Select USB Devices and select Most popular. You can view your photos or play your music and 3 - Select one of the file and press OK to view files videos from a computer or a NAS (Network Attached or press Clear all to clear the list. Storage) in your home network. View last played files The TV and computer or NAS must be in the same 1 - Press SOURCES, select USB and home network. On your computer or NAS, you need press OK. to install Media Server Software. Your Media Server 2 - Select USB Devices and select Last must be set to share your files with the TV. The TV played. shows your files and folders as they are organised by 3 - Select one of the file and press OK to view the Media Server or as they are structured on your files or press Clear all to clear the list. computer or NAS.
The TV does not support subtitles on video streams 14.4 from a computer or NAS. If the Media Server supports searching for files, a From a USB Connection search field is available. You can view your photos or play your music and To browse and play the files on your computer… videos from a connected USB flash drive or USB Hard Drive. 1 - Press SOURCES, select Network and press OK. With the TV switched on, plug in a USB flash drive or a 2 - Select SimplyShare Devices and USB Hard Drive to one of the USB connections. The press (right) to select the device you need. TV detects the device and will list your media files. 3 - You can browse and play your files. If the list of files does not appear automatically… 4 - To stop playing videos, photos and music, press EXIT. 1 - Press SOURCES, select USB and press OK. 2 - Select USB Devices and press (right) to 14.2 select the USB device you need. 3 - You can browse your files in the folder structure Favourites Menu you have organised on the drive. 4 - Press Play all to play all files in the USB Add a folder or a file to favourites menu folder or press Mark favourite to add the selected 1 - Press SOURCES, select USB and folder to favourite menu - Favourites. press OK. 5 - To stop playing videos, photos and music, 2 - Select USB Devices and select a folder or a press EXIT. file. Warning 3 - Press Mark favourite (green) to add the selected folder or file to the favourite menu. If you try to pause or record a programme with a USB View favourite files Hard Drive connected, the TV will ask you to format 1 - Press SOURCES, select USB and the USB Hard Drive. This formatting will delete all press OK. current files on the USB Hard Drive. 2 - Select USB Devices and select Favourites. 3 - You can view all favourite files in the list.
58 14.5 8 - Shuffle: play your files in a random order 9 - Repeat: plays all videos in this folder once or Play your Videos continuously * If INFO key is available on your remote control Play Videos
Open video folder 1 - Press SOURCES, select USB and Video Options press OK. Browse video files... 2 - Select USB Devices and press (right) to select the USB device you need. • List/Thumbnails – List or thumbnails views 3 - Select Videos, you can press Mark • Shuffle – Play your files in a random order favourite to add the video folder to favourite menu • Repeat – Plays all videos in this folder once or - Favourites. continuously • Info – Show video information
Play a video Playing video files... 1 - Press SOURCES, select USB and press OK. • Mark as favourites – Mark the video as favourites 2 - Select USB Devices and press (right) to • Subtitle setting – Set subtitle font size, colour, select the USB device you need. position...etc 3 - Select Videos and select one of video, you can press Play all to play all files in the folder or • Info – Show video information press Mark as favourite to add the selected video to favourite menu - Favourites.
14.6 Control bar View your Photos To show or hide the control bar when a video is playing, press INFO*. About Photo Menu
You can quickly find a photo using sorting: 1 - Press Sort (yellow). 2 - Select Most Recent First, Oldest First, A > Z, Z > A.
View Photos
Open photo folder 1 - Press SOURCES, select USB and press OK. 2 - Select USB Devices and press (right) to select the USB device you need. 1 - Progress bar 3 - Select Photos, you can press Mark 2 - Playback control bar favourite to add the photo folder to favourite menu - : Jump to the previous video in a folder - Favourites or press Sort for quickly - : Jump to the next video in a folder finding a photo. - : Rewind - : Fast forward : Pause the playback - View a photo 1 - Press SOURCES, select USB and press OK. 3 - Mark as favourites 2 - Select USB Devices and press (right) to 4 - Play all videos select the USB device you need. 5 - Subtitle: switch subtitles On, Off or On During 3 - Select Photos and select one of photos, you Mute. can press Slide show to play all files in the 6 - Subtitle language: select a Subtitle Language folder or press Mark favourite to add the 7 - Audio language: select an audio language selected photo to favourite menu - Favourites.
59
About Music Menu Control bar You can quickly find a music using
classification: Genres, Artists, Albums, Tracks.
Play Music
Open photo folder 1 - Press SOURCES, select USB and press OK. 2 - Select USB Devices and press (right) to select the USB device you need. 3 - Select Music, you can press Mark favourite to add the music folder to favourite menu - Favourites. 4 - You can quickly find a music using classification 1 - Playback control bar - Genres, Artists, Albums, Tracks. - : Jump to the previous photo in a folder - : Jump to the next photo in a folder - : Pause the slideshow playback Play music 1 - Press SOURCES, select USB and press OK. 2 - Mark as favourites 2 - Select USB Devices and press (right) to 3 - Start a slideshow select the USB device you need. 4 - Rotate the photo 3 - Select Music and select one of classifications to 5 - Shuffle: play your files in a random order view music files. 6 - Repeat: plays all photos in this folder once or 4 - Select a music and you can press Play continuously all to play all files in the folder or press Mark 7 - Stop the music playing in the background favourite to add the selected music to favourite 8 - Set the speed of the slide show menu - Favourites.
Photo Options Control bar
Browse photo files... • List/Thumbnails – List or thumbnails views • Shuffle – Play your files in a random order • Repeat – Play the slide show once or continuously
• Slide Show Speed – Set the speed of the slide show
Playing photo files... • Mark as favourites – Mark the photo as favourites 1 - Progress bar 2 - Playback control bar • Info – Show photo information - : Jump to the previous music in a folder - : Jump to the next music in a folder - : Rewind 14.7 - : Fast forward Play your Music - : Pause the playback
3 - Mark as favourites 4 - Play all music 5 - Shuffle: play your files in a random order 6 - Repeat: plays all music in this folder once or
60 continuously
Music Options
Browse music files... • Shuffle – Play your files in a random order.
• Repeat – Plays all songs in this folder once or continuously.
Playing music files... • Mark as favourites – Mark the music as favourites
• Info – Show music information
61 15 Internet or vice versa. The TV might have switched to From the Internet automatically. To make the recordings available in the list of TV Guide recordings, switch to the setting that was selected 15.1 when the recordings were made. What You Need 15.3 With the TV Guide you can view a list of the current and scheduled TV programmes of your channels. Using the TV Guide Depending on where the TV guide information (data) is coming from, analogue and digital channels or only Open the TV Guide digital channels are shown. Not all channels offer TV Guide information. To open the TV Guide, press TV GUIDE. The TV Guide shows the channels of the selected tuner. The TV can collect TV Guide information for the channels that are installed on the TV. The TV cannot Press TV GUIDE again to close. collect the TV Guide information for channels viewed The first time you open the TV Guide, the TV scans all from a digital receiver or decoder. TV channels for programme information. This may take several minutes. TV Guide data is stored on TV.
15.2 TV Guide Data Tune to a Programme
The TV Guide receives information (data) from From the TV Guide, you can tune to a current broadcasters or from the Internet. In some regions programme. and for some channels, TV Guide information might not be available. The TV can collect TV Guide To switch to the programme (channel), select the information for the channels that are installed on the programme and press OK. TV. The TV cannot collect the TV Guide information from channels viewed from a digital receiver or View programme details decoder. To call up the details of the selected programme… The TV comes with the information set to From the 1 - Press INFO. Broadcaster. 2 - Press BACK to close. If TV Guide information comes from the Internet, the TV Guide can also list analogue channels next to the digital channels. The TV Guide menu also shows a Change Day small screen with the current channel. The TV Guide can show the scheduled programmes From the Internet for the upcoming days (maximum up to 8 days). If the TV is connected to the Internet, you can set the Press the colour key Day and select the day you TV to receive the TV Guide information from the need. Internet. To set the TV Guide information… 1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK. Set a Reminder 2 - Select General Settings and press (right) to enter the menu. You can set a reminder for a programme. A message 3 - Select Advanced > TV Guide > From the will alert you at the start of the programme. You can Internet and press OK. tune to this channel immediately. 4 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close In the TV Guide a programme with a reminder is the menu. marked with a (clock). Missing recordings To set a reminder… When some recordings seem to have disappeared from the list of recordings, the TV Guide info (data) 1 - Press TV GUIDE and select an upcoming might have changed. Recordings made with the programme. setting From the Broadcaster become invisible in 2 - Press the colour key Set Reminder and press the list if you switch the setting to From the OK. 3 - Press BACK to close the menu.
62 To clear a reminder… 2 - Press the colour key Record . 3 - Press BACK to close the menu. 1 - Press TV GUIDE and select a programme with the reminder. To cancel a recording… 2 - Press the colour key Clear Reminder and 1 - Press TV GUIDE and select the programme press OK. set for recording. 3 - Press BACK to close the menu. 2 - Press the colour key Clear Recording . 3 - Press BACK to close the menu. * See chapter Recording and Pause TV for more Search by Genre information. If the information is available, you can look up scheduled programmes by genre like movies, sports, etc. To search for programmes by genre… 1 - Press TV GUIDE. 2 - Press OPTIONS. 3 - Select Search by Genre and press OK. 4 - Select the genre you want and press OK. A list with the found programmes appears. 5 - You can set reminders or schedule a recording on a selected programme. 6 - Press BACK to close the menu. For more information on Recording, press the colour key Keywords and look up Recording. * Not available when selecting DVB-S channel
List of Reminders
You can view a list of the reminders you have set.
List of Reminders To open the list of reminders… 1 - Press TV GUIDE. 2 - Press the colour key Recordings . 3 - At the top of the screen, select Scheduled and press OK. 4 - In the list of scheduled recordings and reminders, select the tab Reminders and press OK to view the reminders only. 5 - Press the colour key Remove to remove the selected reminder. Press the colour key Record to record the selected programme. 6 - Press BACK to close the menu.
Set a Recording
You can set a recording in the TV Guide*. To see the recording list, press Recordings , a programme set to be recorded is marked with a (red dot) on the front of the programme name. To record a programme… 1 - Press TV GUIDE and select a future or ongoing programme.
63 16 Schedule a Recording Recording and You can schedule a recording of an upcoming programme for today or a few days from today (maximum of 8 days away). The TV will use the data Pause TV from the TV Guide to start and end the recording. To record a programme… 16.1 1 - Press TV GUIDE. Recording 2 - On the TV Guide, select the channel and programme you wish to record. Press (right) What You Need or (left) to scroll through the programmes of a channel. Use the colour key Day to select the You can record a digital TV broadcast and watch it day you need. later. 3 - With the programme highlighted, press the colour To record a TV programme you need… key Record . The programme is scheduled for recording. A warning will show automatically when • a connected USB Hard Drive formatted on this TV overlapping recordings are scheduled. If you plan to • digital TV channels installed on this TV record a programme in your absence, remember to • to receive channel information for the on screen TV leave the TV switched to Standby and the USB Hard Guide Drive switched on. • a reliable TV clock setting. If you reset the TV clock 4 - The TV adds some time margin at the end of the manually, recordings may fail. programme. You can adjust this margin with Auto You cannot record when you are using Pause TV. End Margin. 5 - Press BACK to close the menu. In terms enforcement of copyright legislation, some DVB providers can apply different restriction by means of DRM (Digital Right Management) technology. In case of broadcasting protected List of Recordings channels, recording, record validity or number of You can view and manage your recordings in the list views may be restricted. Recording may be of recordings. Next to the list of recordings, there is a completely prohibited. In case of trying to record a separate list for scheduled recordings and reminders. protected broadcasting or play back an expired recording, an error message can appear. To open the list or recordings… For more information on installing a USB Hard Drive, 1 - Press TV GUIDE. in Help, press the colour key Keywords and 2 - Press the colour key Recordings . look up USB Hard Drive, installation. 3 - In the list of recordings, select the tabs New, Watched or Expired and press OK to Note: filter your view. Recording function is only for digital TV broadcast. It 4 - With a recording selected in the list, you can is not possible to record content from external remove the recording with the colour devices (e.g. HDMI). key Remove or stop an ongoing recording with the colour key Stop Recording . You can rename a recording with the colour key Rename . Record a Programme 5 - Press BACK to close the menu. Broadcasters can limit the number of days a recording Record Now can be viewed. When this period expires, the recording will be marked as expired. A recording in To record the programme you are watching right now, the list can show the number of days before it expires. press (Record) on the remote control. The recording will start immediately. When a scheduled recording was prevented by the broadcaster or when the broadcast was interrupted, a To stop the recording, press (Stop). recording is marked as Failed. When TV Guide data is available, the programme you are watching will be recorded from the moment you pressed the recording key until the programme Recording Conflicts ends. If no TV Guide data is available, the recording will only last 30 minutes. You can adjust the end time When two scheduled recordings are overlapping in of the recording in the list of Recordings. time, there is a recording conflict. To solve a recording conflict, you can adjust the start and end time of one
64 or both scheduled recordings. recordings and reminders. To adjust the start or end time of a scheduled recording… 1 - Press TV GUIDE. Watch a Recording 2 - Press the colour key Recordings . To watch a recording… 3 - At the top of the screen, select Scheduled and press OK. 1 - Press TV GUIDE. 4 - In the list of scheduled recordings and reminders, 2 - Press the colour key Recordings . select the tab Recordings and press OK to view 3 - In the list of recordings, select the recording you the scheduled recordings only. need and press OK to start watching. 5 - Select the scheduled recording that conflicts with 4 - You can use the another scheduled recording and press the colour keys (pause), (play), (rewind), (fast key Adjust Time . forward) or (stop). 6 - Select the start or end time and change the time 5 - To switch back to watch TV, press EXIT. with the (up) or (down) keys. Select Apply and press OK. 7 - Press BACK to close the menu. 16.2 Pause TV
Auto End Margin What You Need You can set the time margin that the TV will add automatically at the end of each scheduled recording. You can pause a digital TV broadcast and resume watching it a bit later. To set the automatic end time margin… To pause a TV programme you need… 1 - Press TV GUIDE. 2 - Press the colour key Recordings . • a connected USB Hard Drive formatted on this TV 3 - Press OPTIONS and select Auto End • digital TV channels installed on this TV Margin and press OK. • to receive channel information for the on screen TV 4 - Press (up) or (down) and press OK to Guide set the time margin added to a recording With the USB Hard Drive connected and formatted, automatically. You can add up to 45 minutes to a the TV continuously stores the TV broadcast you are recording. watching. When you switch to another channel, the 5 - Press BACK to close the menu. broadcast of the former channel is cleared. Also when you switch the TV to standby the broadcast is cleared. Manual Recording You cannot use Pause TV when you are recording. You can schedule a recording that is not linked to a For more information, in Help, press the colour TV programme. You set the tuner type, channel and key Keywords and look up USB Hard Drive, the start and end time yourself. installation. To schedule a recording manually… 1 - Press TV GUIDE. 2 - Press the colour key Recordings . Pause a Programme 3 - At the top of the screen, To pause and resume a broadcast… select Scheduled and press OK. 4 - Press OPTIONS, select Schedule and • To pause a broadcast, press (Pause). A progress press OK. bar at the bottom of the screen appears briefly. 5 - Select the tuner from where you want to record • To call up the progress bar, press (Pause) again. and press OK. • To resume watching, press (Play). 6 - Select the channel to record from and press OK. With the progress bar on screen, press (Rewind) 7 - Select the day of the recording and press OK. or press (Forward) to select from where you want 8 - Set the start and end time of the recording. Select to start viewing the paused broadcast. Press these a button and use the (up) or (down) keys to keys repeatedly to change speed. set the hours and minutes. 9 - Select Record and press OK to schedule the You can pause a broadcast for a maximum time span manual recording. of 90 minutes. The recording will appear in the list of scheduled To switch back to the live TV broadcast,
65 press (Stop).
Replay
Since the TV stores the broadcast you are watching, you can mostly replay the broadcast for a few seconds. To replay a current broadcast… 1 - Press (Pause) 2 - Press (Rewind). You can press repeatedly to select from where you want to start viewing the paused broadcast. Press these keys repeatedly to change speed. At one point you will reach the start of the broadcast storage or the maximum time span. 3 - Press (Play) to watch the broadcast again. 4 - Press (Stop) to watch the broadcast live.
66 17 Cast to Your TV Smartphones and To cast an app to the TV screen… 1 - On your smartphone or tablet, open an app that Tablets supports Google Cast. 2 - Tab the Google Cast icon. 17.1 3 - Select the TV you would like to cast to. 4 - Press play on your smartphone or tablet. What Philips TV Remote App you selected should start playing on TV. The new Philips TV Remote App on your smartphone or tablet is your new TV buddy. 17.3 With the TV Remote App, you master your media around you. Send photos, music or videos to your big AirPlay TV screen or watch any of your TV channels live on To add the AirPlay functionality to your Android TV, your tablet or phone. Look up what you want to you can download and install one of the several watch on the TV Guide and watch it on your phone or Android apps that do just that. You can find several of TV. With the TV Remote App you can use your phone these apps in the Google Play Store. as a remote control. Download the Philips TV Remote App from your favourite app store today. 17.4 The Philips TV Remote App is available for iOS and MHL Android and is free of charge. This TV is MHL™ compliant.
17.2 If your mobile device is also MHL compliant, you can connect your mobile device with a MHL cable to the Google Cast TV. With the MHL cable connected you can share what's on your mobile device on the TV screen. Your What You Need mobile device charges its battery at the same time. The MHL connection is ideal for watching movies or If an app on your mobile device has Google Cast, you playing games from your mobile device on TV for a can cast your app on this TV. On the mobile app, look longer time. for the Google Cast icon. You can use your mobile Charging device to control what's on TV. Google Cast works on Android and iOS. With the MHL cable connected, your device will charge while the TV is switched on (not in standby). Your mobile device must be connected to the same Wi-Fi home network as your TV. MHL Cable Apps with Google Cast You need a passive MHL cable (HDMI to Micro USB) to connect your mobile device to the TV. You might New Google Cast apps come available every need an extra adapter to connect to your mobile day. You can already try it with YouTube, Chrome, device. To connect the MHL cable to the TV use Netflix, Photowall … or Big Web Quiz for the HDMI 1 MHL connection. Chromecast. See also google.com/cast Some Google Play products and features aren't available in all countries. Find more information on support.google.com/androidtv MHL, Mobile High-Definition Link and the MHL Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of the MHL, LLC.
67 18 From a Game Console Games To start a game from a Game Console… 1 - Switch on the Game Console. 18.1 2 - Press SOURCES and select a game console What You Need or the name of the connection. 3 - Start the game. On this TV, you can play games… 4 - Press BACK repeatedly or press EXIT or stop the app with its dedicated • from the App Gallery in the Home menu exit/stop button. • from the Google Play Store in the Home menu • from a connected Game Console For more information on connecting a Game Console, in Help, press the colour key Keywords and Games from the App Gallery or the Google Play Store look up Game Console, connect. must be downloaded and installed on TV before you can play them. Some games need a gamepad to play. To install game apps from the Philips App Gallery or the Google Play Store, the TV must be connected to the Internet. You must agree to the Terms of Use to use apps from the App Gallery. You must sign in with a Google Account to use the Google Play apps and Google Play Store.
18.2 Gamepads
To play games from the Internet on this TV, you can connect a selected range of wireless Gamepads. The TV can support 2 connected Gamepads at a time. When you connect the Gamepad, you can use it immediately. For more information on connecting a gamepad, in Help, press the colour key Keywords and look up Gamepad, connect.
18.3 Play a Game
From the Home menu
To start a game from the Home menu… 1 - Press HOME. 2 - Scroll down to Games , select a game and press OK. 3 - Press BACK repeatedly or press EXIT or stop the app with its dedicated exit/stop button.
68 19 • Rhytm - Based on audio dynamics • Party - A mix of all Follow Audio styles, one after Ambilight the other
19.1 Ambilight Style Follow Colour You can set Ambilight to follow the video or the audio Follow Video dynamics of a TV programme. Alternatively, you can set Ambilight to show a preset colour style or you can You can set Ambilight to follow the video or the audio switch Ambilight off. dynamics of a TV programme. Alternatively, you can If you select Follow Colour, you can select one of the set Ambilight to show a preset colour style or you can preset colour styles. switch Ambilight off. To set the Ambilight Style… If you select Follow Video, you can select one of the styles that follow the dynamics of the picture on your 1 - Press AMBILIGHT. TV screen. 2 - Select Follow Colour and press OK. 3 - Select the style you want and press OK. To set the Ambilight Style… 4 - Press (left) to go back one step or 1 - Press AMBILIGHT. press BACK to close the menu. 2 - Select Follow Video and press OK. The available Follow Colour styles are… 3 - Select the style you want and press OK. 4 - Press (left) to go back one step or • Hot Lava - Red colour variations press BACK to close the menu. • Deep Water - Blue colour variations • Fresh Nature - Green colour variations The available Follow Video styles are… • Warm white - Static colour • Standard - Ideal for day to day TV watching • Cool White - Static colour • Natural - Follows the picture or sound as truthful as possible • Football - Ideal for footbal games • Vivid - Ideal for daylight conditions Follow App You can set Ambilight to follow the video or the audio • Game - Ideal for gaming dynamics of a TV programme. Alternatively, you can • Comfort - Ideal for a quiet evening set Ambilight to show a preset colour style or you can • Relax - Ideal for a lounge feeling switch Ambilight off. Follow App setting is available when you control Ambilight with an app. Follow Audio
You can set Ambilight to follow the video or the audio 19.2 dynamics of a TV programme. Alternatively, you can set Ambilight to show a preset colour style or you can Ambilight Off switch Ambilight off. To switch off Ambilight… If you select Follow Audio, you can select one of the styles that follow the dynamics of the sound. 1 - Press AMBILIGHT. 2 - Select Off and press OK. To set the Ambilight Style… 3 - Press (left) to go back one step or 1 - Press AMBILIGHT. press BACK to close the menu. 2 - Select Follow Audio and press OK. 3 - Select the style you want and press OK. 4 - Press (left) to go back one step or 19.3 press BACK to close the menu. Ambilight Settings The available Follow Audio styles are… • Lumina - Mixes audio dynamics with video colours For more information, in Help, press the colour • Colora - Based on audio dynamics key Keywords and look up Ambilight, • Retro - Based on audio dynamics Settings for more information. • Spectrum - Based on audio dynamics • Scanner - Based on audio dynamics
69 20 Dependent. • you must accept the Terms of Use (You might have accepted already when you connected to the Top Picks Internet.). 20.1 The icon will only appear at the top of the screen About Top Picks when Now on TV is available. The TV does not store former recommendations. With Top Picks your TV recommends… • current TV programmes in Now on TV • online TV services (Catch Up TV) in TV on Demand Using Now on TV • the latest rental videos in Video on Demand • online TV services (Catch Up TV) from Freeview in To open Now on TV… Freeview Play 1 - Press TOP PICKS to open the Top Picks To enjoy Top Picks, connect your TV to the menu. Internet. Make sure you agree to the Terms of Use. 2 - Select Now on TV at the top of the screen The Top Picks information and services are only and press OK. available in selected countries. 3 - Press BACK to close.
Terms of Use When you open Now on TV, the TV may need a few seconds to refresh the page information. To allow the TV to make these recommendations, you must agree to the Terms of Use. To get personalised In Now on TV you can… recommendations based on your viewing habits, • select and press OK on a programme icon to tune make sure you checked the box for Personalized to the ongoing programme. Recommendations Service Opt-In. • select and press OK on a scheduled programme To open the Terms of Use… icon to tune to the channel already. You can use the colour keys on the remote control to 1 - Press TOP PICKS. start, stop or clear a scheduled recording. You can 2 - Press OPTIONS, select Terms of Use and press OK. also set or remove a reminder that warns you when a 3 - Select Privacy Settings and press OK. programme starts. 4 - Select Personalized Recommendations Service To leave Now on TV without tuning to another Opt-In and press OK to check the box. channel, press BACK. Press OK again to uncheck. 5 - Press BACK to close the menu. 20.3
20.2 TV on Demand Now on TV About TV on Demand
About Now on TV With TV on Demand , you can watch TV programmes you missed or watch your favourite With Now on TV , the TV recommends the 10 programmes whenever it suits you best. This service is most popular programmes to watch at this moment. also called Catch Up TV, Replay TV or Online TV. The TV recommends programmes on TV now or Programmes available on TV on Demand are free to starting within 15 minutes. The recommended watch. programmes are selected from the channels you You can let TV on Demand do some personalised installed. The selection is made from channels of your recommendations of programmes, based on the TV country. Also, you can let Now on TV do some installation and the programmes you watch regularly. personalised recommendations for you, based on The icon will only appear at the top of the screen programmes you watch regularly. when TV on Demand is available. To make the Now on TV information available… • the Now on TV information must be available in your country. • the TV must have channels installed. • the TV must be connected to the Internet. • the TV Clock must be set to Automatic or Country
70 You can select a specific video store if more than one Using TV on Demand is available. To open TV on Demand… To rent a movie… 1 - Press TOP PICKS to open the Top Picks 1 - Navigate the highlight on a movie poster. Limited menu. info will show after some seconds. 2 - Select TV on Demand at the top of the 2 - Press OK to open the movie page of the video screen and press OK. store for a synopsis of the movie. 3 - Press (down) to open the page full screen. 3 - Confirm your order. 4 - You can select a specific broadcaster if more than 4 - Make the payment on TV. one is available. 5 - Start watching. You can use the (Play) 5 - Select a programme icon and press OK to start and (Pause) keys. watching. 6 - Press BACK to close. 20.5 When you open TV on Demand, the TV may need a few seconds to refresh the page information. Freeview Play Once a programme started, you can use the (Play) and (Pause) keys. About Freeview Play
To enjoy Freeview Play*, you need to connect your 20.4 TV to Internet first. Video on Demand Freeview Play offers: • Watch TV programmes you missed from the last About Video on Demand seven days • Watch live TV and on demand, all in one place With Video on Demand , you can rent movies without entering an app, you can search Freeview from an online rental video store. Play programmes in TV Guide and Top Picks. • Watch over 60 standard channels and upto 15 HD You can let Video on Demand do some personalised channels recommendations of movies, based on your country, • Enjoy on demand services like BBC iPlayer, the ITV the TV installation and the programmes you watch Hub, All 4, Demand 5 and UKTV Play regularly. • There are no contracts and no monthly costs, you’re The icon will only appear at the top of the screen in control when Video on Demand is available. For detail, please visit: https://www.freeview.co.uk Payment * Freeview Play is only for UK models. When you rent or buy a movie, you can pay the video store securely with your credit card. Most video stores ask you to create a login account the first time Using Freeview Play you rent a movie. To open Freeview Play*… Internet Traffic 1 - Press TOP PICKS to open the Top Picks Streaming a lot of videos may cause you to exceed menu. your monthly Internet traffic limit. 2 - Select Freeview Play at the top of the screen and press OK. 3 - You can sort different types of programmes on Using Video on Demand selecting a specific genre at the top. 4 - Select a programme and press OK to start To open Video on Demand… watching. 1 - Press TOP PICKS to open the Top Picks 5 - Press BACK to close. menu. * Freeview Play is only for UK models. 2 - Select Video on Demand at the top of the screen and press OK. 3 - Use the navigation keys to select a movie poster. 4 - Press BACK to close. When you open Video on Demand, the TV may need a few seconds to refresh the page information.
71 21 21.3 Home Menu Restricted Profile You can restrict the use of certain apps by switching 21.1 the TV to a restricted profile. This restricted profile will About the Home Menu only allow the use of apps which you have selected. You can only switch out of this profile with a PIN To enjoy the benefits of your Android TV, connect the code. TV to the Internet. With the TV switched to a restricted profile you Like on your Android smartphone or tablet, the Home cannot… menu is the centre of your TV. From the Home menu • Find or open apps which are marked as Not allowed you can start any application, switch to a TV channel, • Access the Google Play Store rent a movie, open a website or switch to a • Purchase through Google Play Movies & TV, nor connected device. Depending on your TV setup and Google Play Games your country the Home menu can contain different • Use third-party apps that don't use the Google sign- items. in The Home menu is organised in rows… With the TV switched to a restricted profile you can… Recommendations • Watch content already rented or purchased from Google Play Movies & TV The first row suggests popular videos, music videos or • Play games already purchased and installed from Internet hits. You can set the Privacy settings in Terms Google Play Games of Use to allow suggestions based on your personal • Access the following settings: Wi-Fi network, Speech viewing habits. and Accessibility Philips Collection • Add Bluetooth accessories This row contains suggestions from Apps. The Google Account on TV will stay logged in. Using a restricted profile doesn't change the Google Account. Apps The row of Apps contain all Apps that come with the TV and the Apps you download from the Google Play store yourself. In this row you will also find the Apps for TV, like Watch TV, Sources, Media and others. Apps you started recently will appear in front of the row.
Games From here, you can start a game on TV. If you download a game, it will appear in this row.
Settings From here, you can open a selection of settings. However, to find all settings, press and select All Settings. You can also open Help here. See also www.support.google.com/androidtv
21.2 Open the Home Menu
To open the Home menu and open an item… 1 - Press HOME. 2 - Select an item and press OK to open or start it. 3 - Press BACK to close the Home menu without starting anything.
72 22 Netflix
If you have a Netflix membership subscription, you can enjoy Netflix on this TV. Your TV must be connected to the Internet. In your region, Netflix might only come available with future software updates. To open Netflix, press to open the Netflix App. You can open Netflix immediately from a TV in standby. www.netflix.com
73 23 identification file is written on the USB flash drive. Download the software Software 1 - Insert the USB flash drive into your computer. 2 - On the USB flash drive, locate the 23.1 file update.htm and double click it. 3 - Click Send ID. Update Software 4 - If new software is available, download the .zip file. Update from Internet 5 - After the download, unzip the file and copy the file autorun.upg onto the USB flash drive. Do not If the TV is connected to the Internet, you may receive place this file in a folder. a message to update the TV software. You need a Update the TV software high-speed (broadband) Internet connection. If you 1 - Insert the USB flash drive into the TV again. The receive this message, we recommend you to carry out update starts automatically. the update. 2 - A software update can take several minutes. Do With the message on screen, select Update and not press the key on the TV or remote control. Do follow the instructions on-screen. not remove the USB flash drive. 3 - When the update is done, the TV will return to the You can also look for a software update yourself. channel you were watching. During the software update, there is no picture and If a power cut occurs during the update, never the TV will switch off and on again. This might happen remove the USB flash drive from the TV. When the several times. The update can take a few minutes. power returns, the update will continue. Wait until the TV picture comes back up. Do not press the power switch on the TV or on the remote To prevent an accidental update of the TV software, control during the software update. delete the autorun.upg file from the USB flash drive. To look for a software update yourself… 1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK. 23.2 2 - Select Update Software > Search for Software Version Updates and press OK. 3 - Select Internet and press OK. To view the current TV software version… 4 - The TV will look for an update on the Internet. 5 - If an update is available, you can update the 1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK. software right away. 2 - Select Update Software > Current Software 6 - A software update can take several minutes. Do Info and press OK. not press the key on the TV or remote control. 3 - The version, release notes and creation date are 7 - When the update is done, the TV will return to the shown. Also, the Netflix ESN Number is shown if channel you were watching. available. 4 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close the menu. Update from USB 23.3 It might be necessary to update the TV software. You need a computer with an high-speed Internet Automatic Software Update connection and a USB flash drive to upload the To switch on Automatic software update to update software on the TV. Use a USB flash drive with at least your TV software automatically. Leave the TV in 2Gb free space. Make sure that write protection is standby. switched off. 1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK. To update the TV software… 2 - Select Update Software > Automatic Software 1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK. Update and press OK. 2 - Select Update Software > Search for 3 - Follow the on-screen instruction. Updates and press OK. 4 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close 3 - Select USB and press OK. the menu. Identify the TV When the setting is enabled, the upgrade gets 1 - Insert the USB flash drive into one of the USB downloaded when the TV is powered ON and connections of the TV. installed 15min after the TV has gone to standby (as 2 - Select Write to USB and press OK. An long as there are no recordings or other alarms
74 scheduled). original download site for this software is When the setting is disabled, the "Upgrade Now" / : https://android.googlesource.com/. This piece of "Later" OSD will be shown. software is made available under the terms and conditions of the Apache license version 2, which can be found below. Android APACHE License Version 2 23.4 ( http://source.android.com/source/licenses.html ). This includes all external sources used by official Open Source Software Android AOSP. This television contains open source software. TP Vision Europe B.V. hereby offers to deliver, upon linux kernel (3.10.79) request, a copy of the complete corresponding source code for the copyrighted open source This tv contains the Linux Kernel. The original software packages used in this product for which such download site for this software is offer is requested by the respective licences. : http://www.kernel.org/ . This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the This offer is valid up to three years after product GPL v2 license, which can be found below. purchase to anyone in receipt of this information. Additionally, following exception applies: "NOTE! This To obtain the source code, please write in English to . copyright does *not* cover user programs that use . . kernel services by normal system calls - this is merely [email protected] considered normal use of the kernel, and does *not* fall under the heading of "derived work". Also note that the GPL below is copyrighted by the Free 23.5 Software Foundation, but the instance of code that it refers to (the linux kernel) is copyrighted by me and Open Source License others who actually wrote it. Also note that the only valid version of the GPL as far as the kernel is About Open Source License concerned is _this_ particular version of the license (ie v2, not v2.2 or v3.x or whatever), unless explicitly README for the source code of the parts of TP Vision otherwise stated. Linus Torvalds" Netherlands B.V. TV software that fall under open source licenses. libcurl (7.50.1) This is a document describing the distribution of the source code used on the TP Vision Netherlands B.V. libcurl is a free and easy-to-use client-side URL TV, which fall either under the GNU General Public transfer library, supporting DICT, FILE, FTP, FTPS, License (the GPL), or the GNU Lesser General Public Gopher, HTTP, HTTPS, IMAP, IMAPS, LDAP, LDAPS, License (the LGPL), or any other open source license. POP3, POP3S, RTMP, RTSP, SCP, SFTP, SMTP, Instructions to obtain copies of this software can be SMTPS, Telnet and TFTP. libcurl supports SSL found in the Directions For Use. certificates, HTTP POST, HTTP PUT, FTP uploading, HTTP form based upload, proxies, cookies, TP Vision Netherlands B.V. MAKES NO WARRANTIES user+password authentication (Basic, Digest, NTLM, WHATSOEVER, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, Negotiate, Kerberos), file transfer resume, http proxy INCLUDING ANY WARRANTIES OF tunneling and more! The original download site for MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR this software is PURPOSE, REGARDING THIS SOFTWARE. TP Vision : http://curl.haxx.se/libcurl/ COPYRIGHT AND Netherlands B.V. offers no support for this software. PERMISSION NOTICE Copyright (c) 1996 - 2010, The preceding does not affect your warranties and Daniel Stenberg, [email protected]. All rights reserved. statutory rights regarding any TP Vision Netherlands Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this B.V. product(s) you purchased. It only applies to this software for any purpose with or without fee is source code made available to you. hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT Open Source WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS ORIMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES Android (7.1.1) OF MERCHANTABILITY,FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR This tv contains the Android Nougat Software. PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD Android is a Linux-based operating system designed PARTY RIGHTS. INNO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS primarily for touchscreen mobile devices such as OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY smartphones and tablet computers. This software will CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER also be reused in TPVision Android based TV's. The IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OROTHERWISE,
75 ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USEOR OTHER DEALINGS libpngex (1.4.1) IN THE SOFTWARE. Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not be libpng is the official Portable Network Graphics (PNG) used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, reference library (originally called pnglib). It is a use or other dealings in this Software without prior platform-independent library that contains C written authorization of the copyright holder. functions for handling PNG images. It supports almost all of PNG's features, is extensible. The original
download site for this software is : libfreetypeex (2.4.2) https://github.com/julienr/libpng-androidlibpng license FreeType is a software development library, available in source and binary forms, used to render text on to bitmaps and provides support for other font-related dvbsnoop (1.2) operations. The original download site for this software is dvbsnoop is a DVB / MPEG stream analyzer program. : https://github.com/julienr/libfreetype-android For generating CRC32 values required for composing Freetype License PAT, PMT, EIT sections The original download site for this software is :
https://github.com/a4tunado/dvbsnoop/blob/master libjpegex (8a) /src/misc/crc32.cGPL v2 http://dvbsnoop.sourceforge.net/dvbsnoop.html This package contains C software to implement JPEG image encoding, decoding, and transcoding. This software is based in part on the work of the gSoap (2.7.15) Independent JPEG Group.------The authors make NO WARRANTY or representation, The gSOAP toolkit is an open source C and C++ either express or implied, with respect to this software development toolkit for SOAP/XML Web software, its quality, accuracy, merchantability, or services and generic (non-SOAP) C/C++ XML data fitness for a particular purpose. This software is bindings. Part of the software embedded in this provided "AS IS", and you, its user, assume the entire product is gSOAP software. Portions created by risk as to its quality and accuracy. This software is gSOAP are Copyright 2001-2009 Robert A. van copyright (C) 1991-1998, Thomas G. Lane. All Rights Engelen, Genivia inc. All Rights Reserved. THE Reserved except as specified below. Permission is SOFTWARE IN THIS PRODUCT WAS IN PART hereby granted to use, copy, modify, and distribute PROVIDED BY GENIVIA INC AND ANY EXPRESS OR this software (or portions thereof) for any purpose, IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT without fee, subject to these conditions:(1) If any part LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF of the source code for this software is distributed, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A then this README file must be included, with this PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO copyright and no-warranty notice unaltered; and any EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY additions, deletions, or changes to the original files DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, must be clearly indicated in accompanying EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES documentation.(2) If only executable code is (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT distributed, then the accompanying documentation OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF must state that "this software is based in part on the USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS work of the Independent JPEG Group".(3) Permission INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY for use of this software is granted only if the user THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, accepts full responsibility for any undesirable STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING consequences; the authors accept NO LIABILITY for NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY damages of any kind. These conditions apply to any OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF software derived from or based on the IJG code, not ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. just to the unmodified library. If you use our work, you ought to acknowledge us. Permission is NOT granted for the use of any IJG author's name or company restlet (2.3.0) name in advertising or publicity relating to this Restlet is a lightweight, comprehensive, open source software or products derived from it. This software REST framework for the Java platform. Restlet is may be referred to only as "the Independent JPEG suitable for both server and client Web applications. It Group's software". We specifically permit and supports major Internet transport, data format, and encourage the use of this software as the basis of service description standards like HTTP and HTTPS, commercial products, provided that all warranty or SMTP, XML, JSON, Atom, and WADL. The original liability claims are assumed by the product vendor. download site for this software is
76 : http://restlet.org This piece of software is made made available under the terms and conditions of the available under the terms and conditions of the LGPL v2.1 license, which can be found below. Apache License version 2.
dnsmasq FaceBook SDK (3.0.1) Dnsmasq is a lightweight, easy to configure DNS This TV contains Facebook SDK. The Facebook SDK forwarder and DHCP server. The original download for Android is the easiest way to integrate your site for this software is Android app with Facebook's platform. The SDK : provides support for Login with Facebook https://android.googlesource.com/platform/external/ authentication, reading and writing to Facebook APIs dnmasq This piece of software is made available and support for UI elements such as pickers and under the terms and conditions of the GPL v2 license, dialogs. The original download site for this software is which can be found below. : https://developer.facebook.com/docs/android
This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the Apache License version 2. TomCrypt (1.1) iwedia stack is using tomcrypt for sw decryption. The original download site for this software is ffmpeg (2.1.3) : This TV uses FFmpeg. FFmpeg is a complete, cross- http://manpages.ubuntu.com/manpages/saucy/man platform solution to record, convert and stream audio 3/libtomcrypt.3.html. This piece of software is made and video. The original download site for this available under the terms and conditions of the software is : http://ffmpeg.org This piece of software WTFPL. is made available under the terms and conditions of the GPL v2 license, which can be found below. u-boot (2011-12)
U-boot is a boot loader for embedded boards based gson (2.3) on ARM, MIPS and other processors, which can be This TV uses gson. Gson is a Java library that can be installed in a boot ROM and used to initialize and test used to convert Java Objects into their JSON the hardware or to download and run application representation. It can also be used to convert a JSON code. This piece of software is made available under string to an equivalent Java object. Gson can work the terms and conditions of the GPL v2 license, which with arbitrary Java objects including pre-existing can be found below. objects that you do not have source-code of. The original download site for this software is : https://code.google.com/p/google-gson/ . This AsyncHttpclient (1.4.9) piece of software is made available under the terms The original download site for this software is and conditions of the Apache License 2.0 : http://loopj.com/android-async-http/ This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the APACHE LICENSE 2.0 This software includes an implementation of the AES Cipher, licensed by Brian Gladman. The original download site for this software is httpclient-4.4.1.1 (4.4.1.1) : http://www.gladman.me.uk/ This piece of software is licensed by Brian Gladman. This is needed to import cz.msebera.android.httpclient used by AssyncHttpClientThe original download site for this libUpNp (1.2.1) software is : The original download site for this software is http://mvnrepository.com/artifact/cz.msebera.androi : http://upnp.sourceforge.net/ This piece of software d/httpclient/4.4.1.1 This piece of software is made is made available under the terms and conditions of available under the terms and conditions of the the BSD. APACHE LICENSE 2.0
live555 (0.82) Jackson Parser (2.x) Live555 provides RTP/RTCP/RTSP client.The original Ipepg client uses Jackson Parser for string download site for this software is manipulation. The original download site for this : http://www.live555.com This piece of software is software is
77 : https://github.com/FasterXML/jackson-core This baseline JPEG compression and decompression on piece of software is made available under the terms x86, x86-64, and ARM systems. The original and conditions of the APACHE LICENSE 2.0 download site for this software is : http://www.ijg.org/libjpeg-turbo is covered by
three compatible BSD-style open source licenses. audio a2dp (2.x) Refer to LICENSE.txt for a roll-up of license terms. Bluetooth stack. The original download site for this software is libmtp (1.0.1) : https://android.googlesource.com/platform/system/ libmtp The original download site for this software is bt This piece of software is made available under the : http://libmtp.sourceforge.net/ . This piece of terms and conditions of the APACHE LICENSE 2.0 software is made available under the terms and conditions of the LGPL V2.
libexif (0.6.21) libmdnssd (320.10.80) Exif JPEG header manipulation tool. The original download site for this software is MDNS Responder. The mDNSResponder project is a : http://libexif.sourceforge.net/ This piece of component of Bonjour, 5Apple's ease-of-use IP software is made available under the terms and networking initiative. The original download site for conditions of the APACHE LICENSE 2.0 this software is :
http://www.opensource.apple.com/tarballs/mDNSRe libexpat (2.1.0) sponder/ This piece of software is made available Expat XML Parser. The original download site for this under the terms and conditions of the Apache license software is : http://www.libexpat.org/Expat is free version 2 software. You may copy, distribute, and modify it under the terms of the License contained in the file libnfc_ndef ( ) COPYING distributed with this package. This license is the same as the MIT/X Consortium license. The original download site for this software is : No info. This piece of software is made available under
the terms and conditions of the Apache license libFFTEm ( ) version 2 neven face recognition library. The original download site for this software is : No info. This piece of libskia ( ) software is made available under the terms and conditions of the APACHE LICENSE 2.0 skia 2D graphics library Skia is a complete 2D graphic library for drawing Text, Geometries, and Images. The
original download site for this software is libicui18n (49.1.1) : http://code.google.com/p/skia/ This piece of International Components for unicode. The original software is made available under the terms and download site for this software is conditions of the BSD. : http://icu-project.org This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the libsonivox ( ) BSD. The original download site for this software is : No
info. This piece of software is made available under libiprouteutil (3.4.0) the terms and conditions of the Android APACHE iproute2 TCP/IP networking and traffic control. The License Version 2. original download site for this software is : http://www.linuxfoundation.org/ This piece of libsqlite (3.9.2) software is made available under the terms and conditions of the GPL v2. which can be found below SQLite database. The original download site for this software is : http://www.sqlite.org This piece of
software is made available under the terms and libjpeg (3.4.0) conditions of the Android APACHE License Version 2. libjpeg-turbo is a JPEG image codec that uses SIMD instructions (MMX, SSE2, NEON) to accelerate libttspico ( )
78 The original download site for this software is : No : https://boringssl.googlesource.com/boringssl/ This info. This piece of software is made available under piece of software is made available under the terms the terms and conditions of the Android APACHE and conditions of the BSD. License Version 2.
libOpenMAXAL libtinyalsa ( ) (7b8b9c17db93ea5287575b437c77fb36eeb81b31) tinyalsa: a small library to interface with ALSA in the OpenMAX AL is an application-level multimedia Linux kernel. The original download site for this playback and recording API for mobile embedded software is : No info. This piece of software is made devicesThe original download site for this software is available under the terms and conditions of the BSD. : https://www.khronos.org/openmax/ License free wpa_supplicant (0.8) libOpenSLES (1.0) Library used by legacy HAL to talk to wpa_supplicant Khronos OpenSL Sound API spec. The original daemon. The original download site for this software download site for this software is is : http://hostap.epitest.fi/ This piece of software is : https://www.khronos.org/opensles/ License free made available under the terms and conditions of the
GPLv2. libEGL libGLESv1_CM (3.1)
Khronos OpenGL Graphics API spec. The original libz (1.2.8) download site for this software is zlib compression library. The original download site : https://www.opengl.org/ License free for this software is : http://zlib.net This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the BSD. libffmpeg_av (2.1) FFmpeg media player. The original download site for this software is : https://ffmpeg.org/ This piece of iptables (1.4.20) software is licensed under LGPL v2.1 iptables is a user space application program that allows a system administrator to configure the tables provided by the Linux kernel firewall (implemented as libcurlmheg (7.21.6) different Netfilter modules) and the chains and rules it curl for MHEG. The original download site for this stores. Different kernel modules and programs are software is : https://ffmpeg.org/ Curl and libcurl are currently used for different protocols; iptables applies licensed under a MIT/X derivate license. Please look to IPv4The original download site for this software is at https://curl.haxx.se/docs/copyright.html : https://android.googlesource.com/ This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the GPLv2. boringssl (af0e32cb84f0c9cc65b9233a3414d2562642b342) toolbox (1.2.8) ssl for MHEG, Taken from android M. The original download site for this software is The 'toolbox' command in Android is a multi-function : https://boringssl.googlesource.com/boringssl/ program. It encapsulates the functionality of many Licensed under BSD, please find in /android/n- common Linux commands (and some special Android base/external/boringssl/NOTICE ones) into a single binary. This makes it more compact than having all those other commands installed individually. The original download site for libpng (1.6.22beta) this software is : https://android.googlesource.com/ This piece of libpng is the official Portable Network Graphics (PNG) software is made available under the terms and reference library (originally called pnglib). It is a conditions of the Android APACHE License Version 2. platform-independent library that contains C functions for handling PNG images. It supports almost all of PNG's features, is extensible. The original libssl download site for this software is (7b8b9c17db93ea5287575b437c77fb36eeb81b31) : https://github.com/julienr/libpng-android This code is released under the libpng license. BoringSSL The original download site for this software is
79 Hue SDK (1.8.1) Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided TV ambihue app uses Philips SDK to find the hue that the following conditions are met: bridge name. The original download site for this software is *OR* : Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, https://developers.meethue.com/documentation/jav with or without modification, are permitted provided a-multi-platform-and-android-sdk that the following conditions are met:
Opera Web Browser (SDK 4.8.0) THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY APPLE This TV contains Opera Browser Software. COMPUTER, INC. ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT Third-party licenses LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A WebKit PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL APPLE COMPUTER, INC. name License OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, WebKit URL: http://webkit.org/ INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE (WebKit doesn't distribute an explicit license. This GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, LICENSE is derived from license text in the source.) OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT Copyright (c) 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007 Alexander Kellett, OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE Alexey Proskuryakov, Alex Mathews, Allan Sandfeld USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE Jensen, Alp Toker, Anders Carlsson, Andrew POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Wellington, Antti Koivisto, Apple Inc., Arthur Langereis, Baron Schwartz, Bjoern Graf, Brent Fulgham, Cameron Zwarich, Charles Samuels, GNU LIBRARY GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Christian Dywan, Collabora Ltd., Cyrus Patel, Daniel Version 2, June 1991 Molkentin, Dave Maclachlan, David Smith, Dawit Alemayehu, Dirk Mueller, Dirk Schulze, Don Gibson, Copyright (C) 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Enrico Ros, Eric Seidel, Frederik Holljen, Frerich 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 Raabe, Friedmann Kleint, George Staikos, Google USA Inc., Graham Dennis, Harri Porten, Henry Mason, Hiroyuki Ikezoe, Holger Hans Peter Freyther, Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim IBM, James G. Speth, Jan Alonzo, Jean-Loup Gailly, copies of this license document, but changing it is not John Reis, Jonas Witt, Jon Shier, Jonas Witt, Julien allowed. Chaffraix, Justin Haygood, Kevin Ollivier, Kevin Preamble Watters, Kimmo Kinnunen, Kouhei Sutou, Krzysztof The licenses for most software are designed to take Kowalczyk, Lars Knoll, Luca Bruno, Maks Orlovich, away your freedom to share and change it. By Malte Starostik, Mark Adler, Martin Jones, Marvin contrast, the GNU General Public Licenses are Decker, Matt Lilek, Michael Emmel, Mitz Pettel, intended to guarantee your freedom to share and mozilla.org, Netscape Communications Corporation, change free software--to make sure the software is Nicholas Shanks, Nikolas Zimmermann, Nokia, Oliver free for all its users. Hunt, Opened Hand, Paul Johnston, Peter Kelly, Pioneer Research Center USA, Rich Moore, Rob Buis, This license, the Library General Public License, Robin Dunn, Ronald Tschalär, Samuel Weinig, Simon applies to some specially designated Free Software Hausmann, Staikos Computing Services Inc., Stefan Foundation software, and to any other libraries Schimanski, Symantec Corporation, The whose authors decide to use it. You can use it for Dojo Foundation, The Karbon Developers, Thomas your libraries, too. Boyer, Tim Copperfield, Tobias Anton, Torben Weis, When we speak of free software, we are referring to Trolltech, University of Cambridge, Vaclav Slavik, freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are Waldo Bastian, Xan Lopez, Zack Rusin designed to make sure that you have the freedom to The terms and conditions vary from file to file, but distribute copies of free software (and charge for this are one of: service if you wish), that you receive source code or
80 can get it if you want it, that you can change the Because of this blurred distinction, using the ordinary software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and General Public License for libraries did not effectively that you know you can do these things. promote software sharing, because most developers did not use the libraries. We concluded that weaker To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions conditions might promote sharing better. that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions However, unrestricted linking of non-free programs translate to certain responsibilities for you if you would deprive the users of those programs of all distribute copies of the library, or if you modify it. benefit from the free status of the libraries themselves. This Library General Public License is For example, if you distribute copies of the library, intended to permit developers of non-free programs whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the to use free libraries, while preserving your freedom as recipients all the rights that we gave you. You must a user of such programs to change the free libraries make sure that they, too, receive or can get the that are incorporated in them. (We have not seen how source code. If you link a program with the library, to achieve this as regards changes in header files, but you must provide complete object files to the we have achieved it as regards changes in the actual recipients so that they can relink them with the library, functions of the Library.) The hope is that this will lead after making changes to the library and recompiling it. to faster development of free libraries. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights. The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. Pay close Our method of protecting your rights has two steps: attention to the difference between a"work based on (1) copyright the library, and (2) offer you this license the library" and a "work that uses the library". The which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute former contains code derived from the library, while and/or modify the library. the latter only works together with the library. Also, for each distributor's protection, we want to Note that it is possible for a library to be covered by make certain that everyone understands that there is the ordinary General Public License rather than by no warranty for this free library. If the library is this special one. modified by someone else and passed on, we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original version, so that any problems introduced by GNU LIBRARY GENERAL others will not reflect on the original authors' PUBLIC LICENSE reputations. TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that companies distributing free software will individually obtain patent licenses, thus in effect transforming the 0. This License Agreement applies to any software program into proprietary software. To prevent this, we library which contains a notice placed by the have made it clear that any patent must be licensed copyright holder or other authorized party saying it for everyone's free use or not licensed at all. may be distributed under the terms of this Most GNU software, including some libraries, is Library General Public License (also called "this covered by the ordinary GNU General Public License, License"). Each licensee is addressed as "you". which was designed for utility programs. This license, A "library" means a collection of software functions the GNU Library General Public License, applies to and/or data prepared so as to be conveniently certain designated libraries. This license is quite linked with application programs (which use some of different from the ordinary one; be sure to read it in those functions and data) to form executables. full, and don't assume that anything in it is the same as in the ordinary license. The "Library", below, refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed under The reason we have a separate public license for these terms. A "work based on the Library" means some libraries is that they blur the distinction we either the Library or any derivative work usually make between modifying or adding to a under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing program and simply using it. Linking a program with the Library or a portion of it, either verbatim or with a library, without changing the library, is in some modifications and/or translated straightforwardly sense simply using the library, and is analogous to into another language. (Hereinafter, translation running a utility program or application program. is included without limitation in the term However, in a textual and legal sense, the linked "modification".) executable is a combined work, a derivative of the original library, and the ordinary General Public "Source code" for a work means the preferred form of License treats it as such. the work for making modifications to it. For a library, complete source code means all the source code for
81 all modules it contains, plus any associate interface whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not definition files, plus the scripts used to control derived from the Library, and can be reasonably compilation and installation of the library. considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not Activities other than copying, distribution and apply to those sections when you distribute them as modification are not covered by this License; they separate works. But when you distribute the same are outside its scope. The act of running a program sections as part of a whole which is a work based on using the Library is not restricted, and output the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on from such a program is covered only if its contents the terms of this License, whose permissions for constitute a work based on the Library (independent other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it). to each and every part regardless of who Whether that is true depends on what the Library wrote. Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim does and what the program that uses the Library rights or contest your rights to work written entirely does. by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the works based on the Library. Library's complete source code as you receive it, in In addition, mere aggregation of another work not any medium, provided that you conspicuously and based on the Library with the Library (or with a work appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate based on the Library) on a volume of a storage or copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep distribution medium does not bring the other work intact all the notices that refer to this License and to under the scope of this License. the absence of any warranty; and distribute a copy 3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary of this License along with the GNU General Public License instead of this License You may charge a fee for the physical act of to a given copy of the Library. To do this, you must transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer alter all the notices that refer to this License, so that warranty protection in exchange for a they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library License, version 2, instead of to this License. (If a or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU Library, and copy and distribute such modifications General Public License has appeared, then you can or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided specify that version instead if you wish.) Do not that you also meet all of these conditions: make any other change in these notices. a) The modified work must itself be a software Once this change is made in a given copy, it is library. irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all subsequent b) You must cause the files modified to carry copies and derivative works made from that copy. prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program that is not a c) You must cause the whole of the work to be library. licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License. 4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or derivative of it, under Section 2) in object d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a code or executable form under the terms of Sections function or a table of data to be supplied by an 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it with application program that uses the facility, other than the complete corresponding machine-readable as an argument passed when the facility is invoked, source code, which must be distributed under the then you must make a good faith effort to ensure terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium that, in the event an application does not supply customarily used for software interchange. such function or table, the facility still operates, and performs whatever part of its purpose remains If distribution of object code is made by offering meaningful. access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code (For example, a function in a library to compute from the same place satisfies the requirement square roots has a purpose that is entirely well- to distribute the source code, even though third defined independent of the application. Therefore, parties are not compelled to copy the source along Subsection 2d requires that any application-supplied with the object code. function or table used by this function must be optional: if the application does not supply it, the 5. A program that contains no derivative of any squareroot function must still compute square roots.) portion of the Library, but is designed to work with the Library by being compiled or linked with it, is These requirements apply to the modified work as a called a "work that uses the Library". Such a work, in
82 isolation, is not a derivative work of the Library, Library and then relink to produce a and therefore falls outside the scope of this License. modified executable containing the modified Library. (It is understood that the user who changes
the contents of definitions files in the Library will not However, linking a "work that uses the Library" with necessarily be able to recompile the application to the Library creates an executable that is a derivative use the modified definitions.) of the Library (because it contains portions of the b) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid Library), rather than a "work that uses the library". for at least three years, to give the same user the The executable is therefore covered by this License. materials specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a Section 6 states terms for distribution of such charge no more than the cost of performing this executables. distribution. When a "work that uses the Library" uses material c) If distribution of the work is made by offering from a header file that is part of the Library, the access to copy from a designated place, offer object code for the work may be a derivative work of equivalent access to copy the above specified the Library even though the source code is materials from the same place. not. Whether this is true is especially significant if the d) Verify that the user has already received a work can be linked without the Library, or if the work copy of these materials or that you have already sent is itself a library. The threshold for this to be true is this user a copy. not precisely defined by law. For an executable, the required form of the "work that If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, uses the Library" must include any data and utility data structure layouts and accessors, and small programs needed for reproducing the executable macros and small inline functions (ten lines or less in from it. However, as a special exception, the source length), then the use of the object file is unrestricted, code distributed need not include anything that is regardless of whether it is legally a derivative normally distributed (in either source or binary form) work. (Executables containing this object code plus with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6.) on) of the operating system on which the executable Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, runs, unless that component itself accompanies the you may distribute the object code for the work executable. under the terms of Section 6. Any executables It may happen that this requirement contradicts the containing that work also fall under Section license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that 6, whether or not they are linked directly with the do not normally accompany the operating system. Library itself. Such a contradiction means you cannot use both 6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may them and the Library together in an executable that also compile or link a "work that uses the Library" you distribute. with the Library to produce a work containing portions of the Library, and distribute that work under terms of your choice, provided that the 7. You may place library facilities that are a work terms permit modification of the work for the based on the Library side-by-side in a single library customer's own use and reverse engineering for together with other library facilities not covered by debugging such modifications. this License, and distribute such a combined library, provided that the separate distribution of the work You must give prominent notice with each copy of based on the Library and of the other library facilities the work that the Library is used in it and that the is otherwise permitted, and provided that you do Library and its use are covered by this License. You these two things: must supply a copy of this License. If the work during execution displays copyright notices, a) Accompany the combined library with a copy you must include the copyright notice for the Library of the same work based on the Library, uncombined among them, as well as a reference directing the user with any other library facilities. This must be to the copy of this License. Also, you must do distributed under the terms of the Sections above. one of these things: b) Give prominent notice with the combined a) Accompany the work with the complete library of the fact that part of it is a work based on corresponding machine-readable source code for the Library, and explaining where to find the the Library including whateve changes were used in accompanying uncombined form of the same work. the work (which must be distributed under Sections 1 8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or and 2 above); and, if the work is an executable distribute the Library except as expressly provided linked with the Library, with the complete machine- under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, readable "work that uses the Library", as object code modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library and/or source code, so that the user can modify the
83 is void, and will automatically terminate your rights This section is intended to make thoroughly clear under this License. However, parties who have what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of received copies, or rights, from you under this this License. License will not have their licenses terminated so 12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is long as such parties remain in full compliance. restricted in certain countries either by patents or by 9. You are not required to accept this License, since copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder you have not signed it. However, nothing else who places the Library under this License may grants you permission to modify or distribute the add an explicit geographical distribution limitation Library or its derivative works. These actions excluding those countries, so that distribution is are prohibited by law if you do not accept this permitted only in or among countries not thus License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the Library (or any work based on the Library), you limitation as if written in the body of this License. indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, 13. The Free Software Foundation may publish and all its terms and conditions for copying, revised and/or new versions of the Library General distributing or modifying the Library or works based Public License from time to time. Such new versions on it. will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may 10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. based on the Library), the recipient automatically Each version is given a distinguishing version receives a license from the original licensor to copy, number. If the Library specifies a version number of distribute, link with or modify the Library subject to this License which applies to it and "any later these terms and conditions. You may not impose version", you have the option of following the terms any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of and conditions either of that version or of any later the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for version published by the Free Software Foundation. enforcing compliance by third parties to this License. If the Library does not specify a license version 11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or number, you may choose any version ever published allegation of patent infringement or for any other by the Free Software Foundation. reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are 14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement other free programs whose distribution conditions or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this are incompatible with these, write to the author to License, they do not excuse you from the conditions ask for permission. For software which of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, satisfy simultaneously your obligations under write to the Free Software Foundation; we this License and any other pertinent obligations, then sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision as a consequence you may not distribute the Library will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free at all. For example, if a patent license would not status of all derivatives of our free software and of permit royalty-free redistribution of the Library by all promoting the sharing and reuse of software those who receive copies directly or indirectly generally. through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely NO WARRANTY from distribution of the Library. 15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF If any portion of this section is held invalid or CHARGE, THERE IS NO unenforceable under any particular circumstance, WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT the balance of the section is intended to apply, and PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY "AS IS" to contest validity of any such claims; this section WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, free software distribution system which BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND wide range of software distributed through that FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. system in reliance on consistent application of THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if PERFORMANCE OF THE he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY choice. PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME
84 THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR carefully about whether this license or the ordinary OR CORRECTION. General Public License is the better strategy to use in any particular case, based on the explanations below.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to 16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE freedom of use, not price. Our General Public LAW OR AGREED TO IN Licenses are designed to make sure that you have WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY charge for this service if you wish); that you receive AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS source code or can get it if you want it; that you can PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU change the software and use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you are informed that you can FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, do these things. SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE ask you to surrender these rights. These restrictions LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF translate to certain responsibilities for you if you DATA OR DATA BEING distribute copies of the library or if you modify it. RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY For example, if you distribute copies of the library, YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave you. You must FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY make sure that they, too, receive or can get the OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF source code. If you link other code with the library, SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN you must provide complete object files to the ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH recipients, so that they can relink them with the library after making changes to the library and END OF TERMS AND recompiling it. And you must show them these terms CONDITIONS so they know their rights. We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE copyright the library, and (2) we offer you this license, which gives you legal permission to copy, Version 2.1, February 1999 distribute and/or modify the library. Copyright (C) 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, To protect each distributor, we want to make it very Inc. clear that there is no warranty for the free library. 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA Also, if the library is modified by someone else and 02110-1301 USA passed on, the recipients should know that what they have is not the original version, so that the Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim original author's reputation will not be affected by copies of this license document, but changing it is problems that might be introduced by others. not allowed. Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the [This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It existence of any free program. We wish to make also counts as the successor of the GNU Library sure that a company cannot effectively restrict the Public License, version 2, hence the version number users of a free program by obtaining a restrictive 2.1.] license from a patent holder. Therefore, we insist that any patent license obtained for a version of the Preamble library must be consistent with the full freedom of use specified in this license. The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By Most GNU software, including some libraries, is contrast, the GNU General Public Licenses are covered by the ordinary GNU General Public intended to guarantee your freedom to share and License. This license, the GNU Lesser General change free software--to make sure the software is Public License, applies to certain designated libraries, free for all its users. and is quite different from the ordinary General Public License. We use this license for certain This license, the Lesser General Public License, libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into applies to some specially designated software non-free programs. packages--typically libraries--of the Free Software Foundation and other authors who decide to use it. When a program is linked with a library, whether You can use it too, but we suggest you first think statically or using a shared library, the combination
85 of the two is legally speaking a combined work, a "this License"). Each licensee is addressed as "you". derivative of the original library. The A "library" means a collection of software functions ordinary General Public License therefore permits and/or data prepared so as to be conveniently such linking only if the entire combination fits its linked with application programs (which use some of criteria of freedom. The Lesser General Public those functions and data) to form executables. License permits more lax criteria for linking other code with the library. The "Library", below, refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed under We call this license the "Lesser" General Public these terms. A "work based on the Library" means License because it does Less to protect the user's either the Library or any derivative work freedom than the ordinary General Public License. under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing It also provides other free software developers the Library or a portion of it, either verbatim or with Less of an advantage over competing non-free modifications and/or translated straightforwardly programs. These disadvantages are the reason we into another language. (Hereinafter, translation use the ordinary General Public License for is included without limitation in the term many libraries. However, the Lesser license provides "modification".) advantages in certain special circumstances. "Source code" for a work means the preferred form of For example, on rare occasions, there may be a the work for making modifications to it. For a library, special need to encourage the widest possible use of complete source code means all the source code for a certain library, so that it becomes a de-facto all modules it contains, plus any associated interface standard. To achieve this, non-free programs must definition files, plus the scripts used to control be allowed to use the library. A more frequent case compilation and installation of the library. is that a free library does the same job as widely used non-free libraries. In this case, there is little to Activities other than copying, distribution and gain by limiting the free library to free software only, modification are not covered by this License; they so we use the Lesser General Public License. are outside its scope. The act of running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output In other cases, permission to use a particular library in from such a program is covered only if its contents non-free programs enables a greater number of constitute a work based on the Library (independent people to use a large body of free software. For of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it). example, permission to use the GNU C Library in non- Whether that is true depends on what the Library free programs enables many more people to use the does and what the program that uses the Library whole GNU operating system, as well as its variant, does. the GNU/Linux operating system. 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Although the Lesser General Public License is Less Library's complete source code as you receive it, in protective of the users' freedom, it does ensure that any medium, provided that you conspicuously and the user of a program that is linked with the Library appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep program using a modified version of the Library. intact all the notices that refer to this License and to The precise terms and conditions for copying, the absence of any warranty; and distribute a copy distribution and modification follow. Pay close of this License along with the Library. attention to the difference between a "work based You may charge a fee for the physical act of on the library" and a "work that uses the library". transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer The former contains code derived from the library, warranty protection in exchange for a fee. whereas the latter must be combined with the library in order to run. 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the
Library, and copy and distribute such modifications GNU LESSER GENERAL or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided PUBLIC LICENSE that you also meet all of these conditions: TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, a) The modified work must itself be a software DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION library. b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent noticesstating that you changed the files 0. This License Agreement applies to any software and the date of any change. library or other program which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized c) You must cause the whole of the work to be party saying it may be distributed under the terms licensed at no charge to all third parties under the of this Lesser General Public License (also called terms of this License.
86 d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a 4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a function or a table of data to be supplied by an portion or derivative of it, under Section 2) in object application program that uses the facility, other than code or executable form under the terms of Sections as an argument passed when the facility is invoked, 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it with then you must make a good faith effort to ensure the complete corresponding machine-readable that, in the event an application does not supply source code, which must be distributed under the such function or table, the facility still operates, and terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium performs whatever part of its purpose remains customarily used for software interchange. meaningful. If distribution of object code is made by offering (For example, a function in a library to compute access to copy from a designated place, then square roots has a purpose that is entirely well- offering equivalent access to copy the source code defined independent of the application. Therefore, from the same place satisfies the requirement Subsection 2d requires that any application-supplied to distribute the source code, even though third function or table used by this function must be parties are not compelled to copy the source along optional: if the application does not supply it, the with the object code. square root function must still compute square 5. A program that contains no derivative of any roots.) portion of the Library, but is designed to work with These requirements apply to the modified work as a the Library by being compiled or linked with it, is whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not called a "work that uses the Library". Such a work, in derived from the Library, and can be reasonably isolation, is not a derivative work of the Library, considered independent and separate works and therefore falls outside the scope of this License. in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not However, linking a "work that uses the Library" with apply to those sections when you distribute them as the Library creates an executable that is a derivative separate works. But when you distribute the same of the Library (because it contains portions of the sections as part of a whole which is a work based on Library), rather than a "work that uses the library". the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on The executable is therefore covered by this License. the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus Section 6 states terms for distribution of such to each and every part regardless of who wrote executables. Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights When a "work that uses the Library" uses material or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; from a header file that is part of the Library, the rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the object code for the work may be a derivative work of distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library even though the source code is the Library. not. Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be linked without the Library, or if the work In addition, mere aggregation of another work not is itself a library. The threshold for this to be true is based on the Library with the Library (or with a work not precisely defined by law. based on the Library) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, under the scope of this License. data structure layouts and accessors, and small macros and small inline functions (ten lines or less in 3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary length), then the use of the object file is unrestricted, GNU General Public License instead of this License regardless of whether it is legally a derivative to a given copy of the Library. To do this, you must work. (Executables containing this object code plus alter all the notices that refer to this License, so that portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6.) they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License, version 2, instead of to this License. (If a Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU you may distribute the object code for the work General Public License has appeared, then you can under the terms of Section 6. Any executables specify that version instead if you wish.) Do not containing that work also fall under Section make any other change in these notices. 6, whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself. Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary GNU 6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may General Public License applies to all subsequent also combine or link a "work that uses the Library" copies and derivative works made from that copy. with the Library to produce a work containing portions of the Library, and distribute that This option is useful when you wish to copy part of work under terms of your choice, provided that the the code of the Library into a program that is not a terms permit modification of the work for the library. customer's own use and reverse engineering for
87 debugging such modifications. license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally accompany the operating system. You must give prominent notice with each copy of the Such a contradiction means you cannot use both work that the Library is used in it and that the Library them and the Library together in an executable that and its use are covered by this License. You must you supply a copy of this License. If the work during execution displays copyright notices, you must 7. You may place library facilities that are a work include the copyright notice for the Library among based on the Library side-by-side in a single library them, as well as a reference directing the user to the together with other library facilities not covered by copy of this License. Also, you must do one of this License, and distribute such a combined library, these things: provided that the separate distribution of the work based on the Library and of the other library facilities a) Accompany the work with the complete is otherwise permitted, and provided that you do corresponding machine-readable source code for these two things: the Library including whatever changes were used in the work (which must be distributed under Sections 1 a) Accompany the combined library with a copy and 2 above); and, if the work is an executable of the same work based on the Library, uncombined linked with the Library, with the complete machine- with any other library facilities. This must be readable "work that uses the Library", as object code distributed under the terms of the Sections above. and/or source code, so that the user can modify the b) Give prominent notice with the combined Library and then relink to produce a library of the fact that part of it is a work based on modified executable containing the modified the Library, and explaining where to find the Library. (It is understood that the user who changes accompanying uncombined form of the same work. the contents of definitions files in the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application to 8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or use the modified definitions.) distribute the Library except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library linking with the Library. A suitable mechanism is is void, and will automatically terminate your rights one that (1) uses at run time a copy of the library under this License. However, parties who have already present on the user's computer syste rather received copies, or rights, from you under this than copying library functions into the executable, License will not have their licenses terminated so and (2) will operate properly with a modified version long as such parties remain in full compliance. of the library, if the user installs one, as long as the modified version is interface-compatible with the 9. You are not required to accept this License, since version that the work was made with. you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the c) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid Library or its derivative works. These actions for at least three years, to give the same user the are prohibited by law if you do not accept this materials specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the charge no more than the cost of performing this Library (or any work based on the Library), you distribution. indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, d) If distribution of the work is made by offering and all its terms and conditions for copying, access to copy from a designated place, offer distributing or modifying the Library or works based equivalent access to copy the above specified on it. materials from the same place. 10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work e) Verify that the user has already received a copy based on the Library), the recipient automatically of these materials or that you have already sent this receives a license from the original licensor to copy, user a copy. distribute, link with or modify the Library subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose For an executable, the required form of the "work that any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of uses the Library" must include any data and utility the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for programs needed for reproducing the executable enforcing compliance by third parties with this from it. However, as a special exception, the License. materials to be distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary 11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, allegation of patent infringement or for any other and so on) of the operating system on which the reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are executable runs, unless that component itself imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement accompanies the executable. or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions It may happen that this requirement contradicts the of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to
88 satisfy simultaneously your obligations under is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, this License and any other pertinent obligations, then write to the Free Software Foundation; we as a consequence you may not distribute the Library sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision at all. For example, if a patent license would not will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free permit royalty-free redistribution of the Library by all status of all derivatives of our free software and of those who receive copies directly or indirectly promoting the sharing and reuse of software through you, then the only way you could satisfy generally. both it and this License would be to refrain entirely NO WARRANTY from distribution of the Library.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, 15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF the balance of the section is intended to apply, and CHARGE, THERE IS NO the section as a whole is intended to apply in other WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT circumstances. PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING infringe any patents or other property right claims or THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY "AS IS" free software distribution system which WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY is implemented by public license practices. Many KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, people have made generous contributions to the BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR he or she is willing to distribute software through any PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY other system and a licensee cannot impose that AND PERFORMANCE OF THE choice. LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY This section is intended to make thoroughly clear PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License. THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. 12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder 16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY who places the Library under this License may APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN add an explicit geographical distribution limitation WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY excluding those countries, so that distribution is OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS limitation as if written in the body of this License. PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU 13. The Free Software Foundation may publish FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, revised and/or new versions of the Lesser General SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR Public License from time to time. Such new versions CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF Each version is given a distinguishing version DATA OR DATA BEING number. If the Library specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any later RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY version", you have the option of following the terms YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A and conditions either of that version or of any later FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY version published by the Free Software Foundation. OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF If the Library does not specify a license version number, you may choose any version ever published SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN by the Free Software Foundation. ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH 14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose distribution conditions END OF TERMS AND are incompatible with these, write to the author to CONDITIONS ask for permission. For software which
89 -- Other name License The following files are distributed under the MPL 1.1/GPL 2.0/LGPL 2.1 tri-license: Chromium URL: http://www.chromium.org chromium-nss.h Copyright (c) 2013 The Chromium Authors. All rights reserved. chromium-blapi.h Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, chromium-blapit.h with or without modification, are permitted provided chromium-sha256.h that the following conditions are met: chromium-prtypes.h * Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following The following files contain portions distributed under disclaimer. the MPL 1.1/GPL 2.0/LGPL 2.1 tri-license: * Redistributions in binary form must reproduce registry_controlled_domains/registry_controlled_dom the above ain.cc copyright notice, this list of conditions and the registry_controlled_domains/registry_controlled_dom following disclaimer ain.h in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the The following files are distributed under the MPL 2.0 * Neither the name of Google Inc. nor the names license: of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote Fontconfig products derived from URL: http://www.fontconfig.org this software without specific prior written permission.
Copyright © 2000,2001,2002,2003,2004,2006,2007 THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT Keith Packard HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS Copyright © 2005 Patrick Lam "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT Copyright © 2009 Roozbeh Pournader LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF Copyright © 2008,2009 Red Hat, Inc. MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR Copyright © 2008 Danilo Šegan A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY this software and its DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, documentation for any purpose is hereby granted SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL without fee, provided that DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT the above copyright notice appear in all copies and LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE that both that GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, copyright notice and this permission notice appear in DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) supporting HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY documentation, and that the name of the author(s) THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, not be used in STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING the software without IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE specific, written prior permission. The authors make OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE no POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It
90 is provided "as is" without express or implied "Copyright Holder" means whoever is named in warranty. the copyright or copyrights for the Font. "You" means the licensee, or person copying, redistributing or modifying the Font. THE AUTHOR(S) DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE, "Freely Available" means that you have the freedom to copy or modify the Font as well as INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF redistribute copies of the Font under the same MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS, IN NO conditions you received, not price. If you wish, you EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR(S) BE LIABLE FOR ANY can charge for this service. SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES this Font in any medium, without restriction, provided WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, that you retain this license file (ARPHICPL.TXT) DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF unaltered in all copies. CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER You may otherwise modify your copy of this Font TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN in any way, including modifying glyph, reordering CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR glyph, converting format, changing font name, or adding/deleting some characters in/from glyph table, PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE. and copy and distribute such modifications under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that the following conditions are met: Arphic fonts a) You must insert a prominent notice in each URL: modified file stating how and when you changed that http://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Software/CJKUnifo file. nts/Download b) You must make such modifications Freely ARPHIC PUBLIC LICENSE Available as a whole to all third parties under the Copyright (C) 1999 Arphic Technology Co., Ltd. terms of this License, such as by offering access to copy the modifications from a designated place, or All rights reserved except as specified below. distributing the modifications on a medium customarily used for software interchange. Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim c) If the modified fonts normally reads copies of this license document, but changing it is commands interactively when run, you must cause it, forbidden. when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an
announcement including an appropriate copyright Preamble notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide a warranty) and that users The licenses for most software are designed to may redistribute the Font under these conditions, and take away your freedom to share and change it. By telling the user how to view a copy of this License. contrast, the ARPHIC PUBLIC LICENSE specifically permits and encourages you to use this software, These requirements apply to the modified work provided that you give the recipients all the rights that as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not we gave you and make sure they can get the derived from the Font, and can be reasonably modifications of this software. considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License and its terms, do not
apply to those sections when you distribute them as Legal Terms separate works. Therefore, mere aggregation of Throughout this License, "Font" means the another work not based on the Font with the Font on TrueType fonts "AR PL Mingti2L Big5", "AR PL KaitiM a volume of a storage or distribution medium does Big5" (BIG-5 character set) and "AR PL SungtiL GB", not bring the other work under the scope of this "AR PL KaitiM GB" (GB character set) which are License. originally distributed by Arphic, and the derivatives of You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or those fonts created through any modification distribute the Font except as expressly provided including modifying glyph, reordering glyph, under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, converting format, changing font name, or modify, sublicense or distribute the Font will adding/deleting some characters in/from glyph table. automatically retroactively void your rights under this "PL" means "Public License". License. However, parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License will keep their
91 licenses valid so long as such parties remain in full DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL, compliance. SPECIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE FONT You are not required to accept this License, since (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF you permission to copy, modify, sublicense or USE, DATA OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS distribute the Font. These actions are prohibited by INTERRUPTION), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDERS OR law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by OTHER PARTIES HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE copying, modifying, sublicensing or distributing the POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Font, you indicate your acceptance of this License and all its terms and conditions. Each time you redistribute the Font, the recipient Bitstream Vera fonts automatically receives a license from the original URL: licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Font subject http://www.gnome.org/fonts/#Final_Bitstream_Vera to these terms and conditions. You may not impose _Fonts any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for Bitstream Vera Fonts Copyright enforcing compliance by third parties to this License. The fonts have a generous copyright, allowing If, as a consequence of a court judgment or derivative works (as long as "Bitstream" or "Vera" are allegation of patent infringement or for any other not in the names), and full redistribution (so long as reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are they are not *sold* by themselves). They can be be imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement bundled, redistributed and sold with any software. or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this The fonts are distributed under the following License, they do not excuse you from the conditions copyright: of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License Copyright and any other pertinent obligations, then as a ======consequence you may not distribute the Font at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit Copyright (c) 2003 by Bitstream, Inc. All Rights royalty-free redistribution of the Font by all those Reserved. Bitstream who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, Vera is a trademark of Bitstream, Inc. then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any of the Font. person obtaining If any portion of this section is held invalid or a copy of the fonts accompanying this license unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the ("Fonts") and associated balance of the section is intended to apply and the documentation files (the "Font Software"), to section as a whole is intended to apply in other reproduce and distribute circumstances. the Font Software, including without limitation the BECAUSE THE FONT IS LICENSED FREE OF rights to use, CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE FONT, copy, merge, publish, distribute, and/or sell copies of TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. the Font EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR OTHER PARTIES Software, and to permit persons to whom the Font PROVIDE THE FONT "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY Software is furnished OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, to do so, subject to the following conditions: INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS The above copyright and trademark notices and this FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS permission notice TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE shall be included in all copies of one or more of the FONT IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE FONT PROVE Font Software DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. The Font Software may be modified, altered, or added to, and in UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING, IN NO EVENT WILL ANY particular the designs of glyphs or characters in the COPYRIGHTT HOLDERS, OR OTHER PARTIES WHO Fonts may be MAY COPY, MODIFY OR REDISTRIBUTE THE FONT modified and additional glyphs or characters may be AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY added to the
92 Fonts, only if the fonts are renamed to names not Bitstream is giving away these fonts, but containing either wishes to ensure its the words "Bitstream" or the word "Vera". competitors can't just drop the fonts as is into a font sale system This License becomes null and void to the extent applicable to Fonts and sell them as is. It seems fair that if Bitstream can't make money or Font Software that has been modified and is distributed under the from the Bitstream Vera fonts, their competitors should not be able to "Bitstream Vera" names. do so either. You can sell the fonts as part of The Font Software may be sold as part of a larger any software package, software package but however. no copy of one or more of the Font Software typefaces may be sold by itself. 2. I want to package these fonts separately for distribution and THE FONT SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, sale as part of a larger software package or system. Can I do so? EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY WARRANTIES OF Yes. A RPM or Debian package is a "larger software package" to begin MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT with, and you aren't selling them independently by themselves. OF COPYRIGHT, PATENT, TRADEMARK, OR OTHER RIGHT. IN NO EVENT SHALL See 1. above. BITSTREAM OR THE GNOME FOUNDATION BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR 3. Are derivative works allowed? OTHER LIABILITY, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, Yes! SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR 4. Can I change or add to the font(s)? OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF THE USE OR Yes, but you must change the name(s) of the INABILITY TO USE THE FONT font(s). SOFTWARE OR FROM OTHER DEALINGS IN THE FONT SOFTWARE. 5. Under what terms are derivative works allowed? You must change the name(s) of the fonts. Except as contained in this notice, the names of This is to ensure the Gnome, the Gnome quality of the fonts, both to protect Bitstream Foundation, and Bitstream Inc., shall not be used in and Gnome. We want to advertising or ensure that if an application has opened a otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings font specifically of these in this Font names, it gets what it expects (though of Software without prior written authorization from the course, using fontconfig, Gnome Foundation substitutions could still could have occurred or Bitstream Inc., respectively. For further information, during font contact: opening). You must include the Bitstream fonts at gnome dot org. copyright. Additional copyrights can be added, as per copyright law. Happy Font Hacking! Copyright FAQ
======6. If I have improvements for Bitstream Vera, is it 1. I don't understand the resale restriction... What possible they might get gives?
93 adopted in future versions? substitution. Yes. The contract between the Gnome Foundation and Bitstream has Open Sans fonts provisions for working with Bitstream to ensure URL: quality additions to http://www.google.com/fonts/specimen/Open+Sans the Bitstream Vera font family. Please contact us if you have such
additions. Note, that in general, we will want License for Open Sans Font Family such additions for the ------entire family, not just a single font, and that you'll have to keep Apache License both Gnome and Jim Lyles, Vera's designer, Version 2.0, happy! To make sense to add January 2004 glyphs to the font, they must be stylistically in keeping with Vera's http://www.apache.org/licenses/ design. Vera cannot become a "ransom note" font. Jim Lyles will be TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE, providing a document describing the design REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION elements used in Vera, as a guide and aid for people interested in 1. Definitions. contributing to Vera. "License" shall mean the terms and conditions for use, reproduction, 7. I want to sell a software package that uses these and distribution as defined by Sections 1 fonts: Can I do so? through 9 of this document. Sure. Bundle the fonts with your software and "Licensor" shall mean the copyright owner or sell your software entity authorized by with the fonts. That is the intent of the the copyright owner that is granting the copyright. License. "Legal Entity" shall mean the union of the 8. If applications have built the names "Bitstream acting entity and all Vera" into them, other entities that control, are controlled by, or can I override this somehow to use fonts of my are under common choosing? control with that entity. For the purposes of This depends on exact details of the software. this definition, Most open source "control" means (i) the power, direct or systems and software (e.g., Gnome, KDE, etc.) indirect, to cause the are now converting to direction or management of such entity, use fontconfig (see www.fontconfig.org ) to whether by contract or handle font configuration, otherwise, or (ii) ownership of fifty percent selection and substitution; it has provisions for (50%) or more of the overriding font outstanding shares, or (iii) beneficial names and subsituting alternatives. An ownership of such entity. example is provided by the "You" (or "Your") shall mean an individual or supplied local.conf file, which chooses the Legal Entity family Bitstream Vera for exercising permissions granted by this License. "sans", "serif" and "monospace". Other "Source" form shall mean the preferred form software (e.g., the XFree86 for making modifications, core server) has other mechanisms for font including but not limited to software source
94 code, documentation and issue tracking systems that are managed by, or on behalf of, the source, and configuration files. Licensor for the purpose of discussing and "Object" form shall mean any form resulting improving the Work, but from mechanical excluding communication that is transformation or translation of a Source form, conspicuously marked or otherwise including but designated in writing by the copyright owner not limited to compiled object code, as "Not a Contribution." generated documentation, "Contributor" shall mean Licensor and any and conversions to other media types. individual or Legal Entity "Work" shall mean the work of authorship, on behalf of whom a Contribution has been whether in Source or received by Licensor and Object form, made available under the subsequently incorporated within the Work. License, as indicated by a
copyright notice that is included in or attached to the work 2. Grant of Copyright License. Subject to the terms and conditions of (an example is provided in the Appendix below). this License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual, "Derivative Works" shall mean any work, whether in Source or Object worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty- free, irrevocable form, that is based on (or derived from) the Work and for which the copyright license to reproduce, prepare Derivative Works of, editorial revisions, annotations, elaborations, or other modifications publicly display, publicly perform, sublicense, and distribute the represent, as a whole, an original work of authorship. For the purposes Work and such Derivative Works in Source or Object form. of this License, Derivative Works shall not include works that remain separable from, or merely link (or bind by 3. Grant of Patent License. Subject to the terms name) to the interfaces of, and conditions of the Work and Derivative Works thereof. this License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual, "Contribution" shall mean any work of authorship, including worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty- free, irrevocable the original version of the Work and any modifications or additions (except as stated in this section) patent license to make, have made, to that Work or Derivative Works thereof, that is intentionally use, offer to sell, sell, import, and otherwise transfer the Work, submitted to Licensor for inclusion in the Work by the copyright owner where such license applies only to those patent claims licensable or by an individual or Legal Entity authorized to submit on behalf of by such Contributor that are necessarily infringed by their the copyright owner. For the purposes of this definition, "submitted" Contribution(s) alone or by combination of their Contribution(s) means any form of electronic, verbal, or written communication sent with the Work to which such Contribution(s) was submitted. If You to the Licensor or its representatives, including but not limited to institute patent litigation against any entity (including a communication on electronic mailing lists, source code control systems, cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit)
95 alleging that the Work the Derivative Works; or, or a Contribution incorporated within the Work within a display generated by the constitutes direct Derivative Works, if and or contributory patent infringement, then any wherever such third-party notices patent licenses normally appear. The contents granted to You under this License for that of the NOTICE file are for informational Work shall terminate purposes only and as of the date such litigation is filed. do not modify the License. You may add Your own attribution
notices within Derivative Works that You 4. Redistribution. You may reproduce and distribute, alongside distribute copies of the or as an addendum to the NOTICE text Work or Derivative Works thereof in any from the Work, provided medium, with or without that such additional attribution notices modifications, and in Source or Object form, cannot be construed provided that You as modifying the License. meet the following conditions:
You may add Your own copyright statement to (a) You must give any other recipients of the Your modifications and Work or may provide additional or different license Derivative Works a copy of this License; terms and conditions and for use, reproduction, or distribution of Your (b) You must cause any modified files to carry modifications, or prominent notices for any such Derivative Works as a whole, stating that You changed the files; and provided Your use, (c) You must retain, in the Source form of any reproduction, and distribution of the Work Derivative Works otherwise complies with that You distribute, all copyright, patent, the conditions stated in this License. trademark, and
attribution notices from the Source form of the Work, 5. Submission of Contributions. Unless You explicitly state otherwise, excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of any Contribution intentionally submitted for inclusion in the Work the Derivative Works; and by You to the Licensor shall be under the (d) If the Work includes a "NOTICE" text file as terms and conditions of part of its this License, without any additional terms or distribution, then any Derivative Works conditions. that You distribute must Notwithstanding the above, nothing herein include a readable copy of the shall supersede or modify attribution notices contained the terms of any separate license agreement within such NOTICE file, excluding those you may have executed notices that do not with Licensor regarding such Contributions. pertain to any part of the Derivative Works, in at least one of the following places: within a NOTICE 6. Trademarks. This License does not grant text file distributed permission to use the trade as part of the Derivative Works; within names, trademarks, service marks, or product the Source form or names of the Licensor, documentation, if provided along with except as required for reasonable and
96 customary use in describing the the Work or Derivative Works thereof, You may choose to offer, origin of the Work and reproducing the content of the NOTICE file. and charge a fee for, acceptance of support, warranty, indemnity,
or other liability obligations and/or rights 7. Disclaimer of Warranty. Unless required by consistent with this applicable law or License. However, in accepting such agreed to in writing, Licensor provides the obligations, You may act only Work (and each on Your own behalf and on Your sole Contributor provides its Contributions) on an responsibility, not on behalf "AS IS" BASIS, of any other Contributor, and only if You agree WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF to indemnify, ANY KIND, either express or defend, and hold each Contributor harmless implied, including, without limitation, any for any liability warranties or conditions incurred by, or claims asserted against, such of TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, Contributor by reason MERCHANTABILITY, or FITNESS FOR A of your accepting any such warranty or PARTICULAR PURPOSE. You are solely additional liability. responsible for determining the
appropriateness of using or redistributing the Work and assume any END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS risks associated with Your exercise of permissions under this License. APPENDIX: How to apply the Apache License to your work. 8. Limitation of Liability. In no event and under no legal theory, To apply the Apache License to your work, whether in tort (including negligence), attach the following contract, or otherwise, boilerplate notice, with the fields enclosed by unless required by applicable law (such as brackets "[]" deliberate and grossly replaced with your own identifying negligent acts) or agreed to in writing, shall information. (Don't include any Contributor be the brackets!) The text should be enclosed in liable to You for damages, including any the appropriate direct, indirect, special, comment syntax for the file format. We also incidental, or consequential damages of any recommend that a character arising as a file or class name and description of purpose result of this License or out of the use or be included on the inability to use the same "printed page" as the copyright notice Work (including but not limited to damages for for easier loss of goodwill, identification within third-party archives. work stoppage, computer failure or malfunction, or any and all Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner] other commercial damages or losses), even if such Contributor has been advised of the possibility of such Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 damages. (the "License"); you may not use this file except in compliance with the License. 9. Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability. While redistributing You may obtain a copy of the License at
97 Copyright (C) 2006-2009 Daisuke SUZUKI
All rights reserved. Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software distributed under the License is distributed on an Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, "AS IS" BASIS, with or without WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY modification, are permitted provided that the KIND, either express or implied. following conditions See the License for the specific language are met: governing permissions and this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. limitations under the License. this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation VL Gothic fonts and/or other materials provided with the distribution. URL: http://dicey.org/vlgothic/index.html the names of its contributors may be used to License for VLGothic Font Family endorse or promote products ------derived from this software without specific prior This font includes glyphs derived from M+ FONTS written permission. which is created by
M+ FONTS PROJECT. License for M+ FONTS part is THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY WADA described in M+ FONTS LABORATORY, THE UNIVERSITY OF TOKYO AND PROJECT's license. See attached 'LICENSE_E.mplus'. CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR This font also includes glyphs derived from IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT Sazanami Gothic font which NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF is created by Electronic Font Open Laboratory MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A (/efont/). License for PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO Sazanami Gothic part is described in it's license. See EVENT SHALL THE LABORATORY OR attached CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, 'README.sazanami' for original Sazanami Gothic font INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, license. EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES This font also includes original glyphs which is (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, created by Daisuke PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SUZUKI and Project Vine based on M+ FONTS. Licese SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; for VL Gothic OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED original glyphs is same as M+ FONTS PROJECT's AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, license. WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR There is no limitation and the below description is TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR not applied OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE as for in order not to reuse as font (ex: font is OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF embeded to documents). ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Copyright (c) 1990-2003 Wada Laboratory, the Nanum fonts University of Tokyo. URL: http://hangeul.naver.com/ Copyright (c) 2003-2004 Electronic Font Open Laboratory (/efont/). Copyright (c) 2010, NAVER Corporation ( http://www.nhncorp.com ). Copyright (C) 2003-2009 M+ FONTS PROJECT
98 with Reserved Font Name Nanum, Naver Nanum, Software components as distributed by the NanumGothic, Naver NanumGothic, Copyright Holder(s). NanumMyeongjo, Naver NanumMyeongjo, "Modified Version" refers to any derivative made by NanumBrush, Naver NanumBrush, NanumPen, Naver adding to, deleting, or substituting -- in part or in NanumPen, Naver NanumGothicEco, whole -- any of the components of the Original NanumGothicEco, Naver NanumMyeongjoEco, Version, by changing formats or by porting the Font NanumMyeongjoEco, Naver NanumGothicLight, Software to a new environment. NanumGothicLight, NanumBarunGothic, Naver NanumBarunGothic, "Author" refers to any designer, engineer, programmer, technical writer or other person who This Font Software is licensed under the SIL Open contributed to the Font Software. Font License, Version 1.1. PERMISSION & CONDITIONS This license is copied below, and is also available with a FAQ at: http://scripts.sil.org/OFL Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining This Font Software is licensed under the SIL Open Font License, Version 1.1. a copy of the Font Software, to use, study, copy, merge, embed, modify, This license is copied below, and is also available with a FAQ at: redistribute, and sell modified and unmodified copies of the Font http://scripts.sil.org/OFL Software, subject to the following conditions:
------1) Neither the Font Software nor any of its individual components, SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE Version 1.1 - 26 February 2007 in Original or Modified Versions, may be sold by itself. ------2) Original or Modified Versions of the Font Software may be bundled, PREAMBLE redistributed and/or sold with any software, provided that each copy The goals of the Open Font License (OFL) are to stimulate worldwide development of collaborative contains the above copyright notice and this license. font projects, to support the font creation efforts of These can be academic and linguistic communities, and to provide included either as stand-alone text files, human- a free and open framework in which fonts may be readable headers or shared and improved in partnership with others. in the appropriate machine-readable metadata fields The OFL allows the licensed fonts to be used, within text or studied, modified and redistributed freely as long as they are not sold by themselves. The fonts, including binary files as long as those fields can be easily any derivative works, can be bundled, viewed by the user. embedded, redistributed and/or sold with any software provided that any reserved names are not used by derivative works. The fonts and 3) No Modified Version of the Font Software may use derivatives, however, cannot be released under any the Reserved Font other type of license. The requirement for fonts to Name(s) unless explicit written permission is granted remain under this license does not apply to any by the corresponding document created using the fonts or their derivatives. Copyright Holder. This restriction only applies to the DEFINITIONS primary font name as "Font Software" refers to the set of files released by presented to the users. the Copyright Holder(s) under this license and clearly marked as such. This may include source files, build scripts and documentation. 4) The name(s) of the Copyright Holder(s) or the "Reserved Font Name" refers to any names specified Author(s) of the Font as such after the copyright statement(s). Software shall not be used to promote, endorse or "Original Version" refers to the collection of Font advertise any
99 Modified Version, except to acknowledge the If you link the application to a modified version of contribution(s) of the Mini-XML, then the changes to Mini-XML must be provided under the terms of the LGPL2 in sections 1, Copyright Holder(s) and the Author(s) or with their 2, and 4. explicit written
GNU LIBRARY GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE 5) The Font Software, modified or unmodified, in part or in whole, Version 2, June 1991 must be distributed entirely under this license, and Copyright (C) 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. must not be 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, distributed under any other license. The requirement USA for fonts to Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim remain under this license does not apply to any copies of this license document, but changing it is not document created allowed. using the Font Software. [This is the first released version of the library GPL. It is numbered 2 because it goes with version 2 of the
ordinary GPL.] TERMINATION
This license becomes null and void if any of the Preamble above conditions are The licenses for most software are designed to take not met. away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public Licenses are DISCLAIMER intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software--to make sure the software is THE FONT SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", free for all its users. WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, This license, the Library General Public License, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT applies to some specially designated Free Software LIMITED TO ANY WARRANTIES OF Foundation software, and to any other libraries MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR whose authors decide to use it. You can use it for PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT your libraries, too. OF COPYRIGHT, PATENT, TRADEMARK, OR OTHER When we speak of free software, we are referring to RIGHT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, distribute copies of free software (and charge for this DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, service if you wish), that you receive source code or INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT, can get it if you want it, that you can change the INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things. DAMAGES, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask FROM, OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE you to surrender the rights. These restrictions FONT SOFTWARE OR FROM translate to certain responsibilities for you if you OTHER DEALINGS IN THE FONT SOFTWARE. distribute copies of the library, or if you modify it. For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the Mini-XML recipients all the rights that we gave you. You must URL: http://www.msweet.org/projects.php?Z3 make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. If you link a program with the library,
you must provide complete object files to the Mini-XML License recipients so that they can relink them with the library, The Mini-XML library and included programs are after making changes to the library and recompiling it. provided under the terms of the GNU Library General And you must show them these terms so they know Public License version 2 (LGPL2) with the following their rights. exceptions: Our method of protecting your rights has two steps:
100 (1) copyright the library, and (2) offer you this license the libary" and a "work that uses the library". The which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute former contains code derived from the library, while and/or modify the library. the latter only works together with the library. Also, for each distributor's protection, we want to Note that it is possible for a library to be covered by make certain that everyone understands that there is the ordinary General Public License rather than by no warranty for this free library. If the library is this special one. modified by someone else and passed on, we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original version, so that any problems introduced by TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, others will not reflect on the original authors' DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION reputations. A "library" means a collection of software functions Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by and/or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that with application programs (which use some of those companies distributing free software will individually functions and data) to form executables. obtain patent licenses, thus in effect transforming the The "Library", below, refers to any such software program into proprietary software. To prevent this, we library or work which has been distributed under have made it clear that any patent must be licensed these terms. A "work based on the Library" means for everyone's free use or not licensed at all. either the Library or any derivative work under Most GNU software, including some libraries, is copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the covered by the ordinary GNU General Public License, Library or a portion of it, either verbatim or with which was designed for utility programs. This license, modifications and/or translated straightforwardly into the GNU Library General Public License, applies to another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included certain designated libraries. This license is quite without limitation in the term "modification".) different from the ordinary one; be sure to read it in "Source code" for a work means the preferred form of full, and don't assume that anything in it is the same the work for making modifications to it. For a library, as in the ordinary license. complete source code means all the source code for The reason we have a separate public license for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface some libraries is that they blur the distinction we definition files, plus the scripts used to control usually make between modifying or adding to a compilation and installation of the library. program and simply using it. Linking a program with a Activities other than copying, distribution and library, without changing the library, is in some sense modification are not covered by this License; they are simply using the library, and is analogous to running a outside its scope. The act of running a program using utility program or application program. However, in a the Library is not restricted, and output from such a textual and legal sense, the linked executable is a program is covered only if its contents constitute a combined work, a derivative of the original library, work based on the Library (independent of the use of and the ordinary General Public License treats it as the Library in a tool for writing it). Whether that is true such. depends on what the Library does and what the Because of this blurred distinction, using the ordinary program that uses the Library does. General Public License for libraries did not effectively You may charge a fee for the physical act of promote software sharing, because most developers transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer did not use the libraries. We concluded that weaker warranty protection in exchange for a fee. conditions might promote sharing better. a) The modified work must itself be a software library. However, unrestricted linking of non-free programs would deprive the users of those programs of all b) You must cause the files modified to carry benefit from the free status of the libraries prominent notices stating that you changed the files themselves. This Library General Public License is and the date of any change. intended to permit developers of non-free programs c) You must cause the whole of the work to be to use free libraries, while preserving your freedom as licensed at no charge to all third parties under the a user of such programs to change the free libraries terms of this License. that are incorporated in them. (We have not seen how to achieve this as regards changes in header files, but d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a we have achieved it as regards changes in the actual function or a table of data to be supplied by an functions of the Library.) The hope is that this will lead application program that uses the facility, other than to faster development of free libraries. as an argument passed when the facility is invoked, then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that, The precise terms and conditions for copying, in the event an application does not supply such distribution and modification follow. Pay close function or table, the facility still operates, and attention to the difference between a "work based on
101 performs whatever part of its purpose remains this is true is especially significant if the work can be meaningful. linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library. The threshold for this to be true is not (For example, a function in a library to compute precisely defined by law. square roots has a purpose that is entirely well- defined independent of the application. Therefore, If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, Subsection 2d requires that any application-supplied data structure layouts and accessors, and small function or table used by this function must be macros and small inline functions (ten lines or less in optional: if the application does not supply it, the length), then the use of the object file is unrestricted, square root function must still compute square roots.) regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work. (Executables containing this object code plus These requirements apply to the modified work as a portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6.) whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library, and can be reasonably Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, considered independent and separate works in you may distribute the object code for the work under themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not the terms of Section 6. Any executables containing apply to those sections when you distribute them as that work also fall under Section 6, whether or not separate works. But when you distribute the same they are linked directly with the Library itself. sections as part of a whole which is a work based on You must give prominent notice with each copy of the the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on work that the Library is used in it and that the Library the terms of this License, whose permissions for other and its use are covered by this License. You must licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to supply a copy of this License. If the work during each and every part regardless of who wrote it. execution displays copyright notices, you must Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights include the copyright notice for the Library among or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; them, as well as a reference directing the user to the rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the copy of this License. Also, you must do one of these distribution of derivative or collective works based on things: the Library. a) Accompany the work with the complete In addition, mere aggregation of another work not corresponding machine-readable source code for the based on the Library with the Library (or with a work Library including whatever changes were used in the based on the Library) on a volume of a storage or work (which must be distributed under Sections 1 and distribution medium does not bring the other work 2 above); and, if the work is an executable linked with under the scope of this License. the Library, with the complete machine-readable "work that uses the Library", as object code and/or Once this change is made in a given copy, it is source code, so that the user can modify the Library irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary GNU and then relink to produce a modified executable General Public License applies to all subsequent containing the modified Library. (It is understood that copies and derivative works made from that copy. the user who changes the contents of definitions files This option is useful when you wish to copy part of in the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the code of the Library into a program that is not a the application to use the modified definitions.) library. b) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for If distribution of object code is made by offering at least three years, to give the same user the access to copy from a designated place, then offering materials specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a equivalent access to copy the source code from the charge no more than the cost of performing this same place satisfies the requirement to distribute the distribution. source code, even though third parties are not c) If distribution of the work is made by offering compelled to copy the source along with the object access to copy from a designated place, offer code. equivalent access to copy the above specified However, linking a "work that uses the Library" with materials from the same place. the Library creates an executable that is a derivative d) Verify that the user has already received a copy of of the Library (because it contains portions of the these materials or that you have already sent this user Library), rather than a "work that uses the library". The a copy. executable is therefore covered by this License. Section 6 states terms for distribution of such For an executable, the required form of the "work that executables. uses the Library" must include any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable When a "work that uses the Library" uses material from it. However, as a special exception, the source from a header file that is part of the Library, the object code distributed need not include anything that is code for the work may be a derivative work of the normally distributed (in either source or binary form) Library even though the source code is not. Whether
102 with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so recommend making it free software that everyone on) of the operating system on which the executable can redistribute and change. You can do so by runs, unless that component itself accompanies the permitting redistribution under these terms (or, executable. alternatively, under the terms of the ordinary General Public License). It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that To apply these terms, attach the following notices to do not normally accompany the operating system. the library. It is safest to attach them to the start of Such a contradiction means you cannot use both each source file to most effectively convey the them and the Library together in an executable that exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at you distribute. least the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found. a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library, uncombined one line to give the library's name and an idea of with any other library facilities. This must be what it does. distributed under the terms of the Sections above. Copyright (C) year name of author b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of This library is free software; you can redistribute it the fact that part of it is a work based on the Library, and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser and explaining where to find the accompanying General Public License as published by the Free uncombined form of the same work. Software Foundation; either version 2.1 of the License, If any portion of this section is held invalid or or (at your option) any later version. unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the This library is distributed in the hope that it will be balance of the section is intended to apply, and the useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even section as a whole is intended to apply in other the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or circumstances. FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to Lesser General Public License for more details. infringe any patents or other property right claims or You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser to contest validity of any such claims; this section has General Public License along with this library; if not, the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 software distribution system which is implemented by Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software Also add information on how to contact you by distributed through that system in reliance on electronic and paper mail. consistent application of that system; it is up to the You should also get your employer (if you work as a author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a distribute software through any other system and a "copyright disclaimer" for the library, if necessary. licensee cannot impose that choice. Here is a sample; alter the names: This section is intended to make thoroughly clear Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of in the library `Frob' (a library for tweaking knobs) this License. written by James Random Hacker. Each version is given a distinguishing version number. signature of Ty Coon, 1 April 1990 Ty Coon, President If the Library specifies a version number of this of Vice License which applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of following the terms and That's all there is to it! conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Library does not specify a license version number, Boost you may choose any version ever published by the URL: http://www.boost.org/ Free Software Foundation. Boost Software License - Version 1.0 - August 17th, NO WARRANTY 2003
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person or organization How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries obtaining a copy of the software and accompanying documentation covered by If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, we this license (the "Software") to use, reproduce,
103 display, distribute, WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, execute, and transmit the Software, and to prepare FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND derivative works of the NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN Software, and to permit third-parties to whom the NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT Software is furnished to HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, do so, all subject to the following: DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR
OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN The copyright notices in the Software and this entire CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE statement, including OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. the above license grant, this restriction and the following disclaimer, Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not must be included in all copies of the Software, in whole or in part, and be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings all derivative works of the Software, unless such copies or derivative in this Software without prior written authorization of the copyright holder. works are solely in the form of machine-executable object code generated by a source language processor. libcurl - lib/krb5.c URL: https://github.com/bagder/curl/blob/master/lib/krb5 THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT .c WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR /* GSSAPI/krb5 support for FTP - loosely based on IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE old krb4.c WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, * FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT * Copyright (c) 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2013 Kungliga Tekniska Högskolan SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR ANYONE DISTRIBUTING THE SOFTWARE BE LIABLE * (Royal Institute of Technology, Stockholm, Sweden). FOR ANY DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, * Copyright (c) 2004 - 2012 Daniel Stenberg ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH * All rights reserved. THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER * DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without libcurl * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions URL: http://curl.haxx.se/ * are met: COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE * Copyright (c) 1996 - 2014, Daniel Stenberg,
104 provided with the distribution. * below. * * * 3. Neither the name of the Institute nor the names * Copyright (c) 1998, 1999, 2013 Kungliga Tekniska of its contributors Högskolan * may be used to endorse or promote products * (Royal Institute of Technology, Stockholm, derived from this software Sweden). * without specific prior written permission. * * * Copyright (C) 2001 - 2013, Daniel Stenberg,
* libcurl - lib/security.c * 3. Neither the name of the Institute nor the names URL: of its contributors https://github.com/bagder/curl/blob/master/lib/secu rity.c * may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
* without specific prior written permission. /* This source code was modified by Martin Hedenfalk
105 PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS /* Copyright (c) 2008-2009, Google Inc. * OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; * All rights reserved. OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) * * HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT with or without * LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR * modification, are permitted provided that the OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY following conditions are * OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF * met: ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF * * SUCH DAMAGE. */ * * Redistributions of source code must retain
the above copyright David M. Gay's floating point routines * notice, this list of conditions and the following URL: http://www.netlib.org/fp/ disclaimer. /********************************************************* * * Neither the name of Google Inc. nor the ******* names of its * * contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from * The author of this software is David M. Gay. * this software without specific prior written * permission. * Copyright (c) 1991, 2000, 2001 by Lucent * Technologies. * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE * COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS * Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this * "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED software for any WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT * purpose without fee is hereby granted, provided * LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF that this entire notice MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR * is included in all copies of any software which is or * A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN includes a copy NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT * or modification of this software and in all copies of * OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY the supporting DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, * documentation for such software. * SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT * THIS SOFTWARE IS BEING PROVIDED "AS IS", * LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, * WARRANTY. IN PARTICULAR, NEITHER THE * DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS AUTHOR NOR LUCENT MAKES ANY INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY * REPRESENTATION OR WARRANTY OF ANY KIND * THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, CONCERNING THE MERCHANTABILITY STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT * OF THIS SOFTWARE OR ITS FITNESS FOR ANY * (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) PARTICULAR PURPOSE. ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE * * OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE ******************************************************** POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. *******/ * * --- dynamic annotations * Author: Kostya Serebryany URL: http://code.google.com/p/data-race- */ test/wiki/DynamicAnnotations
106 libevent URL: http://libevent.org/ Portions of Libevent are based on works by others, also made available by Libevent is available for use under the following license, commonly known them under the three-clause BSD license above. The copyright notices are as the 3-clause (or "modified") BSD license: available in the corresponding source files; the license
is as above. Here's ======a list: Copyright (c) 2000-2007 Niels Provos
California. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, Copyright (c) 1998 Todd C. Miller with or without
107 * * Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this * The Initial Developer of the Original Code is list of conditions and the following disclaimer. * Netscape Communications Corporation. * Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the * Portions created by the Initial Developer are above copyright notice, this Copyright (C) 1998-2000 list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the * the Initial Developer. All Rights Reserved. documentation and/or * other materials provided with the distribution. * Contributor(s): * Neither my name, Paul Hsieh, nor the names of any * other contributors to the * Alternatively, the contents of this file may be used code use may not be used to endorse or promote under the terms of products derived from this * either the GNU General Public License Version 2 or software without specific prior written permission. later (the "GPL"), or
* the GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2.1 THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT or later (the "LGPL"), HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND * in which case the provisions of the GPL or the ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, LGPL are applicable instead INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED * of those above. If you wish to allow use of your WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS version of this file only FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE * under the terms of either the GPL or the LGPL, and ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, not to allow others to EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES * use your version of this file under the terms of the (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT MPL, indicate your OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; * decision by deleting the provisions above and LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS replace them with the notice INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON * and other provisions required by the GPL or the ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN LGPL. If you do not delete CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT * the provisions above, a recipient may use your (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING version of this file under IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS * the terms of any one of the MPL, the GPL or the SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY LGPL. OF SUCH DAMAGE. *
* ***** END LICENSE BLOCK ***** */ google-glog's symbolization library
URL: https://github.com/google/glog Paul Hsieh's SuperFastHash Copyright (c) 2006, Google Inc. URL: All rights reserved. http://www.azillionmonkeys.com/qed/hash.html
Paul Hsieh OLD BSD license Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, Copyright (c) 2010, Paul Hsieh with or without modification, are permitted provided All rights reserved. that the following conditions are met: * Redistributions of source code must retain the Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the with or without modification, following disclaimer. are permitted provided that the following conditions * Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the are met: above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
108 * Neither the name of Google Inc. nor the names of are met: its contributors may be used to endorse or promote 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the products derived from this software without specific above copyright prior written permission. notice, this list of conditions and the following THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT disclaimer. HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS 2. The origin of this software must not be "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED misrepresented; you must WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT not claim that you wrote the original LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF software. If you use this MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR software in a product, an acknowledgment in A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO the product EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT documentation would be appreciated but is OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY not required. DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, 3. Altered source versions must be plainly marked SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL as such, and must DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT not be misrepresented as being the original LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE software. GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, 4. The name of the author may not be used to DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) endorse or promote HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY products derived from this software without THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, specific prior written STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT permission. (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED valgrind WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND URL: http://valgrind.org FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE Notice that the following BSD-style license applies AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY to the Valgrind header DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, files used by Chromium (valgrind.h and EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL memcheck.h). However, the rest of DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, Valgrind is licensed under the terms of the GNU PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE General Public License, GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR version 2, unless otherwise indicated. PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, ------WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY Copyright (C) 2000-2008 Julian Seward. All WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS rights reserved. SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without Mozilla Personal Security Manager modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions URL: http://mxr.mozilla.org/mozilla-
109 central/source/security/manager/ replace them with the notice * and other provisions required by the GPL or the LGPL. If you do not delete /* ***** BEGIN LICENSE BLOCK ***** * the provisions above, a recipient may use your * Version: MPL 1.1/GPL 2.0/LGPL 2.1 version of this file under * * the terms of any one of the MPL, the GPL or the * The contents of this file are subject to the Mozilla LGPL. Public License Version * * 1.1 (the "License"); you may not use this file except * ***** END LICENSE BLOCK ***** */ in compliance with
* the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at Network Security Services (NSS) * http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/ URL: http://www.mozilla.org/projects/security/pki/nss/ *
* Software distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, /* ***** BEGIN LICENSE BLOCK ***** * WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either * Version: MPL 1.1/GPL 2.0/LGPL 2.1 express or implied. See the License * * for the specific language governing rights and * The contents of this file are subject to the Mozilla limitations under the Public License Version * License. * 1.1 (the "License"); you may not use this file except * in compliance with * The Original Code is the Netscape security libraries. * the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at * * http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/ * The Initial Developer of the Original Code is * * Netscape Communications Corporation. * Software distributed under the License is * Portions created by the Initial Developer are distributed on an "AS IS" basis, Copyright (C) 2000 * WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either * the Initial Developer. All Rights Reserved. express or implied. See the License * * for the specific language governing rights and * Contributor(s): limitations under the * * License. * Alternatively, the contents of this file may be used * under the terms of * The Original Code is the Netscape security libraries. * either the GNU General Public License Version 2 or * later (the "GPL"), or * The Initial Developer of the Original Code is * the GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2.1 or later (the "LGPL"), * Netscape Communications Corporation. * in which case the provisions of the GPL or the * Portions created by the Initial Developer are LGPL are applicable instead Copyright (C) 1994-2000 * of those above. If you wish to allow use of your * the Initial Developer. All Rights Reserved. version of this file only * * under the terms of either the GPL or the LGPL, and * Contributor(s): not to allow others to * * use your version of this file under the terms of the MPL, indicate your * Alternatively, the contents of this file may be used under the terms of * decision by deleting the provisions above and
110 * either the GNU General Public License Version 2 or "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED later (the "GPL"), or WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT * the GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2.1 LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF or later (the "LGPL"), MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS * in which case the provisions of the GPL or the FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN LGPL are applicable instead NO EVENT SHALL THE * of those above. If you wish to allow use of your COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE version of this file only FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, * under the terms of either the GPL or the LGPL, and INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR not to allow others to CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, * use your version of this file under the terms of the BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF MPL, indicate your SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; * decision by deleting the provisions above and LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS replace them with the notice INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER * and other provisions required by the GPL or the CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, LGPL. If you do not delete WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT * the provisions above, a recipient may use your LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR version of this file under OTHERWISE) ARISING IN * the terms of any one of the MPL, the GPL or the ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, LGPL. EVEN IF ADVISED OF THEPOSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. *
* ***** END LICENSE BLOCK ***** */ boringssl
URL: https://boringssl.googlesource.com/boringssl open-vcdiff
URL: https://github.com/google/open-vcdiff LICENSE ISSUES
======Almost Native Graphics Layer Engine The OpenSSL toolkit stays under a dual license, i.e. URL: http://code.google.com/p/angleproject/ both the conditions of Copyright (C) 2002-2013 The ANGLE Project Authors. the OpenSSL License and the original SSLeay All rights reserved. license apply to the toolkit. See below for the actual license texts. Actually both Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, licenses are BSD-style with or without modification, are permitted provided Open Source licenses. In case of any license issues that the following conditions are met: related to OpenSSL Redistributions of source code must retain the above please contact [email protected]. copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. OpenSSL License Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the ------following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. /* ======Neither the name of TransGaming Inc., Google Inc., ======3DLabs Inc. Ltd., nor the names of their contributors may be used to endorse or promote products * Copyright (c) 1998-2011 The OpenSSL Project. All derived from this software without specific prior rights reserved. written permission. * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS with or without
111 * modification, are permitted provided that the * following conditions * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL * are met: PROJECT ``AS IS'' AND ANY * * EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. * PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR * * ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, the above copyright * SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL * notice, this list of conditions and the following DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT disclaimer in * NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF * the documentation and/or other materials SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; provided with the * LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS * distribution. INTERRUPTION) * * HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF * 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, use of this * STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING * software must display the following NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) acknowledgment: * ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS * "This product includes software developed by SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED the OpenSSL Project * OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. * for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. ( * ======http://www.openssl.org/ )" ======* * * 4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL * This product includes cryptographic software Project" must not be used to written by Eric Young * endorse or promote products derived from this * ([email protected]). This product includes software without software written by Tim * prior written permission. For written * Hudson ([email protected]). permission, please contact * * [email protected]. */ *
* 5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" Original SSLeay License * nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names ------without prior written
* permission of the OpenSSL Project. /* Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young * ([email protected]) * 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must * All rights reserved. retain the following * * acknowledgment: * This package is an SSL implementation written * "This product includes software developed by * by Eric Young ([email protected]). the OpenSSL Project * The implementation was written so as to conform * for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit ( with Netscapes SSL. http://www.openssl.org/ )"
112 * * being used are not cryptographic related :-). * This library is free for commercial and non- * 4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a commercial use as long as derivative thereof) from * the following conditions are aheared to. The * the apps directory (application code) you must following conditions include an acknowledgement: * apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the * "This product includes software written by Tim RC4, RSA, Hudson ([email protected])" * lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The * SSL documentation * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG * included with this distribution is covered by the ``AS IS'' AND same copyright terms * ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, * except that the holder is Tim Hudson INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE ([email protected]). * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY * AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE * Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any * ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE Copyright notices in AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE * the code are not to be removed. * FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL * If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS * as the author of the parts of the library used. * OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; * This can be in the form of a textual message at OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) program startup or * HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF * in documentation (online or textual) provided with LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT the package. * LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR * OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, * OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF with or without ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF * modification, are permitted provided that the * SUCH DAMAGE. following conditions * * are met: * The licence and distribution terms for any * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the publically available version or copyright * derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this * notice, this list of conditions and the following code cannot simply be disclaimer. * copied and put under another distribution licence * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright * [including the GNU Public Licence.] * notice, this list of conditions and the following */ disclaimer in the
* documentation and/or other materials Brotli provided with the distribution. URL: https://github.com/google/brotli * 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software * must display the following acknowledgement: Google Cache Invalidation API * "This product includes cryptographic software URL: written by https://chromium.googlesource.com/chromium/src/+ /master/third_party/cacheinvalidation/README.chro * Eric Young ([email protected])" mium * The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines from the library
113 Crashpad DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT URL: https://crashpad.chromium.org/ LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) drawElements Quality Program HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY URL: THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, https://source.android.com/devices/graphics/testing. STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT html (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING
IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE dom-distiller-js OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE URL: https://github.com/chromium/dom-distiller POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Copyright 2014 The Chromium Authors. All rights reserved.
Parts of the following directories are available under Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, Apache v2.0 with or without modification, are permitted provided that the src/de following conditions are Copyright (c) 2009-2011 Christian Kohlschütter met:
third_party/gwt_exporter * Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright Copyright 2007 Timepedia.org notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. third_party/gwt-2.5.1 * Redistributions in binary form must reproduce Copyright 2008 Google the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer java/org/chromium/distiller/dev in the documentation and/or other materials provided Copyright 2008 Google with the * Neither the name of Google Inc. nor the names Apache License of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from Version 2.0, January 2004 this software without specific prior written permission. http://www.apache.org/licenses/ THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE, "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR "License" shall mean the terms and conditions for A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO use, reproduction, and distribution as defined by EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT Sections 1 through 9 of this document. OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, "Licensor" shall mean the copyright owner or entity SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
114 authorized by the copyright owner that is granting the but not limited to communication on electronic License. mailing lists, source code control systems, and issue tracking systems that are managed by, or on behalf
of, the Licensor for the purpose of discussing and "Legal Entity" shall mean the union of the acting improving the Work, but excluding communication entity and all other entities that control, are controlled that is conspicuously marked or otherwise designated by, or are under common control with that entity. For in writing by the copyright owner as "Not a the purposes of this definition, "control" means (i) the Contribution." power, direct or indirect, to cause the direction or management of such entity, whether by contract or otherwise, or (ii) ownership of fifty percent (50%) or "Contributor" shall mean Licensor and any individual more of the outstanding shares, or (iii) beneficial or Legal Entity on behalf of whom a Contribution has ownership of such entity. been received by Licensor and subsequently incorporated within the Work.
You must give any other recipients of the Work or "You" (or "Your") shall mean an individual or Legal Derivative Works a copy of this License; and Entity exercising permissions granted by this License. You must cause any modified files to carry prominent
notices stating that You changed the files; and "Source" form shall mean the preferred form for You must retain, in the Source form of any Derivative making modifications, including but not limited to Works that You distribute, all copyright, patent, software source code, documentation source, and trademark, and attribution notices from the Source configuration files. form of the Work, excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works; and "Object" form shall mean any form resulting from If the Work includes a "NOTICE" text file as part of its mechanical transformation or translation of a Source distribution, then any Derivative Works that You form, including but not limited to compiled object distribute must include a readable copy of the code, generated documentation, and conversions to attribution notices contained within such NOTICE file, other media types. excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works, in at least one of the following places: within a NOTICE text file distributed "Work" shall mean the work of authorship, whether in as part of the Derivative Works; within the Source Source or Object form, made available under the form or documentation, if provided along with the License, as indicated by a copyright notice that is Derivative Works; or, within a display generated by included in or attached to the work (an example is the Derivative Works, if and wherever such third-party provided in the Appendix below). notices normally appear. The contents of the NOTICE file are for informational purposes only and do not modify the License. You may add Your own "Derivative Works" shall mean any work, whether in attribution notices within Derivative Works that You Source or Object form, that is based on (or derived distribute, alongside or as an addendum to the from) the Work and for which the editorial revisions, NOTICE text from the Work, provided that such annotations, elaborations, or other modifications additional attribution notices cannot be construed as represent, as a whole, an original work of authorship. modifying the License. For the purposes of this License, Derivative Works shall not include works that remain separable from, or merely link (or bind by name) to the interfaces of, the You may add Your own copyright statement to Your Work and Derivative Works thereof. modifications and may provide additional or different license terms and conditions for use, reproduction, or distribution of Your modifications, or for any such "Contribution" shall mean any work of authorship, Derivative Works as a whole, provided Your use, including the original version of the Work and any reproduction, and distribution of the Work otherwise modifications or additions to that Work or Derivative complies with the conditions stated in this License. Works thereof, that is intentionally submitted to Licensor for inclusion in the Work by the copyright END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS owner or by an individual or Legal Entity authorized to submit on behalf of the copyright owner. For the purposes of this definition, "submitted" means any Expat XML Parser form of electronic, verbal, or written communication URL: http://sourceforge.net/projects/expat/ sent to the Licensor or its representatives, including
115 Copyright (c) 1998, 1999, 2000 Thai Open Source with or without Software Center Ltd modification, are permitted provided that the and Clark following conditions Cooper are met: Copyright (c) 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006
Expat maintainers. 1.Redistributions of source code must retain the
above copyright notice, Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any this list of conditions and the following person obtaining disclaimer. a copy of this software and associated 2.Redistributions in binary form must reproduce documentation files (the the above copyright "Software"), to deal in the Software without notice, this list of conditions and the restriction, including following disclaimer in the without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, documentation and/or other materials merge, publish, provided with the distribution. distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the 3.The name of the author may not be used to Software, and to endorse or promote products permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to derived from this software without specific do so, subject to prior written permission. the following conditions:
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR The above copyright notice and this permission ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS notice shall be included OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY fips181 OF SUCH DAMAGE. URL: http://www.adel.nursat.kz/apg/
Copyright (c) 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002 flac Adel I. Mirzazhanov. All rights reserved URL: http://sourceforge.net/projects/flac/files/flac- src/flac-1.2.1-src/flac-1.2.1.tar.gz/download Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
116 Copyright (C) SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY 2000,2001,2002,2003,2004,2005,2006,2007 Josh OF SUCH DAMAGE. Coalson
harfbuzz-ng Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, URL: http://harfbuzz.org with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions HarfBuzz is licensed under the so-called "Old MIT" license. Details follow. are met: For parts of HarfBuzz that are licensed under different
licenses see individual - Redistributions of source code must retain the files names COPYING in subdirectories where above copyright applicable. notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. Copyright © 2010,2011,2012 Google, Inc.
Copyright © 2012 Mozilla Foundation - Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright Copyright © 2011 Codethink Limited notice, this list of conditions and the following Copyright © 2008,2010 Nokia Corporation and/or its disclaimer in the subsidiary(-ies) documentation and/or other materials provided with Copyright © 2009 Keith Stribley the distribution. Copyright © 2009 Martin Hosken and SIL International - Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor Copyright © 2007 Chris Wilson the names of its Copyright © 2006 Behdad Esfahbod contributors may be used to endorse or promote Copyright © 2005 David Turner products derived from Copyright © 2004,2007,2008,2009,2010 Red Hat, this software without specific prior written permission. Inc. Copyright © 1998-2004 David Turner and Werner THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT Lemberg HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED For full copyright notices consult the individual files in WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT the package. LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR Permission is hereby granted, without written agreement and without CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, license or royalty fees, to use, copy, modify, and distribute this EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, software and its documentation for any purpose, provided that the PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR above copyright notice and the following two paragraphs appear in PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF all copies of this software. LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY LIABLE TO ANY PARTY FOR OUT OF THE USE OF THIS DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR
117 CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES accompanying ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE AND documentation must state that "this software is based ITS DOCUMENTATION, EVEN in part on the work of IF THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF the Independent JPEG Group". THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH (3) Permission for use of this software is granted only if the user accepts THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS full responsibility for any undesirable consequences; ANY WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, the authors accept BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES NO LIABILITY for damages of any kind. OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE These conditions apply to any software derived from SOFTWARE PROVIDED HEREUNDER IS or based on the IJG code, ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, AND THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER not just to the unmodified library. If you use our HAS NO OBLIGATION TO work, you ought to PROVIDE MAINTENANCE, SUPPORT, UPDATES, acknowledge us. ENHANCEMENTS, OR MODIFICATIONS.
Permission is NOT granted for the use of any IJG iccjpeg author's name or company name URL: http://www.ijg.org in advertising or publicity relating to this software or products derived from it. The authors make NO WARRANTY or representation, This software may be referred to only as "the either express or implied, Independent JPEG Group's with respect to this software, its quality, accuracy, software". merchantability, or fitness for a particular purpose. This software is We specifically permit and encourage the use of this provided "AS IS", and you, software as the basis of its user, assume the entire risk as to its quality and commercial products, provided that all warranty or accuracy. liability claims are
assumed by the product vendor. This software is copyright (C) 1991-1998, Thomas G.
Lane.
All Rights Reserved except as specified below. icu
URL: http://site.icu-project.org/ Permission is hereby granted to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software (or portions thereof) for any purpose, ICU License - ICU 1.8.1 and later without fee, subject to these conditions: COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE (1) If any part of the source code for this software is distributed, then this Copyright (c) 1995-2014 International Business README file must be included, with this copyright Machines Corporation and and no-warranty notice others unaltered; and any additions, deletions, or changes to the original files must be clearly indicated in accompanying All rights reserved. documentation. (2) If only executable code is distributed, then the Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to
118 any person obtaining a property of their respective owners. copy of this software and associated ______documentation files (the ______"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including Third-Party Software Licenses without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, This section contains third-party software notices distribute, and/or sell copies of the Software, and and/or additional to permit persons to terms for licensed third-party software whom the Software is furnished to do so, provided components included within ICU that the above libraries. copyright notice(s) and this permission notice appear in all copies of the Software and that both the above copyright 1. Unicode Data Files and Software notice(s) and this permission notice appear in supporting COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE documentation.
Copyright © 1991-2014 Unicode, Inc. All rights THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT reserved. WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS Distributed under the Terms of Use in OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF http://www.unicode.org/copyright.html. MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE person obtaining COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR HOLDERS a copy of the Unicode data files and any associated INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY documentation CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT (the "Data Files") or Unicode software and any OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY associated documentation DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS (the "Software") to deal in the Data Files or Software OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN without restriction, including without limitation the ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR rights to use, OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, and/or sell IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR copies of PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE. the Data Files or Software, and to permit persons to whom the Data Files Except as contained in this notice, the name of a or Software are furnished to do so, provided that copyright holder shall (a) this copyright and permission notice appear with not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote all copies the sale, use or of the Data Files or Software, other dealings in this Software without prior (b) this copyright and permission notice appear in written authorization of associated the copyright holder. documentation, and ______(c) there is clear notice in each modified Data File or ______in the Software as well as in the documentation associated with the All trademarks and registered trademarks Data File(s) or mentioned herein are the Software that the data or software has been modified.
119 # THE DATA FILES AND SOFTWARE ARE PROVIDED # Redistributions of source code must retain "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF the above copyright notice, th ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT is list of conditions and the following disclaimer. NOT LIMITED TO THE # Redistributions in binary form must WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR reproduce the above copyright notice, A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. the documentation and/or IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR other materials provided with the distribution. HOLDERS INCLUDED IN THIS # Neither the name of Google Inc. nor the NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, OR ANY names of its contributors may be SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL used to endorse or promote products derived from DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER this software without specific RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, prior written permission. DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF # CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER # TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR # THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS I PERFORMANCE OF THE DATA FILES OR SOFTWARE. S" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPL Except as contained in this notice, the name of a IED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND copyright holder FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLA shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to ECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, promote the sale, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDIN use or other dealings in these Data Files or Software G, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF without prior SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, written authorization of the copyright holder. DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF L 2. Chinese/Japanese Word Break Dictionary Data IABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, (cjdict.txt) OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED O # The Google Chrome software developed by Google is licensed under the BSD li F THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. ses, as set forth below. # # # # The BSD License # The word list in cjdict.txt are generated by combining three word lists l # http://opensource.org/licenses/bsd- license.php isted # Copyright (C) 2006-2008, Google Inc. # below with further processing for compound word breaking. The frequency i # s generated # All rights reserved. # with an iterative training against Google # web corpora. # Redistribution and use in source and binary # forms, with or without modifi # * Libtabe (Chinese) cation, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: # - https://sourceforge.net/project/?group_id=1519
120 # - Its license terms and conditions are WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS shown below. # * FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE # DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE # * IPADIC (Japanese) # * REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, # - http://chasen.aist- # * INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR nara.ac.jp/chasen/distribution.html CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES # - Its license terms and conditions are # * (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, shown below. PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR # # * SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) # ------COPYING.libtabe ---- BEGIN------# * HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, # # * STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING # /* NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) # * Copyrighy (c) 1999 TaBE Project. # * ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE # * Copyright (c) 1999 Pai-Hsiang Hsiao. OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED # * All rights reserved. # * OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH # * DAMAGE. # * Redistribution and use in source and # */ binary forms, with or without # # * modification, are permitted provided # /* that the following conditions # * Copyright (c) 1999 Computer Systems # * are met: and Communication Lab, # * # * Institute of # * . Redistributions of source code must Information Science, Academia Sinica. retain the above copyright # * All rights reserved. # * notice, this list of conditions and the # * following disclaimer. # * Redistribution and use in source and # * . Redistributions in binary form must binary forms, with or without reproduce the above copyright # * modification, are permitted provided # * notice, this list of conditions and the that the following conditions following disclaimer in # * are met: # * the documentation and/or other # * materials provided with the # * . Redistributions of source code must # * distribution. retain the above copyright # * . Neither the name of the TaBE Project # * notice, this list of conditions and the nor the names of its following disclaimer. # * contributors may be used to endorse # * . Redistributions in binary form must or promote products derived reproduce the above copyright # * from this software without specific # * notice, this list of conditions and the prior written permission. following disclaimer in # * # * the documentation and/or other # * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE materials provided with the COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS # * distribution. # * "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED # * . Neither the name of the Computer WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT Systems and Communication Lab # * LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
121 # * nor the names of its contributors may Institute of Science be used to endorse or # and Technology. All Rights Reserved. # * promote products derived from this # software without specific # Use, reproduction, and distribution of this # * prior written permission. software is permitted. # * # Any copy of this software, whether in its # * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE original form or modified, COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS # must include both the above copyright # * "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED notice and the following WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT # paragraphs. # * LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED # WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS # Nara Institute of Science and Technology # * FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE (NAIST), DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE # the copyright holders, disclaims all # * REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE warranties with regard to this LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, # software, including all implied warranties of # * INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR merchantability and CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES # fitness, in no event shall NAIST be liable for # * (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR # any special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages # * SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) # whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether in an # * HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, # action of contract, negligence or other tortuous action, arising out # * STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) # of or in connection with the use or performance of this software. # * ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED # # * OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH # A large portion of the dictionary entries DAMAGE. # originate from ICOT Free Software. The # */ following conditions for ICOT # # Free Software applies to the current dictionary as well. # Copyright 1996 Chih-Hao Tsai @ Beckman Institute, University of Illinois # # [email protected] # Each User may also freely distribute the http://casper.beckman.uiuc.edu/~c-tsai4 Program, whether in its # # original form or modified, to any third party or parties, PROVIDED # ------COPYING.libtabe-----END ------# that the provisions of Section 3 ("NO WARRANTY") will ALWAYS appear - # on, or be attached to, the Program, which is # distributed substantially # # in the same form as set out herein and that # ------COPYING.ipadic-----BEGI such intended N------# distribution, if actually made, will neither -- violate or otherwise # # contravene any of the laws and regulations of the countries having # Copyright 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003 Nara
122 # jurisdiction over the User or the intended # regardless of whether they have been distribution itself. advised of, or otherwise had # # knowledge of, the possibility of such damages at any time during the # NO WARRANTY # project or thereafter. Each user will be # deemed to have agreed to the # The program was produced on an # foregoing by his or her commencement of experimental basis in the course of the use of the program. The term # research and development conducted # "use" as used herein includes, but is not during the project and is provided limited to, the use, # to users as so produced on an # modification, copying and distribution of experimental basis. Accordingly, the the program and the # program is provided without any warranty # production of secondary products from the whatsoever, whether express, program. # implied, statutory or otherwise. The term # "warranty" used herein # In the case where the program, whether in # includes, but is not limited to, any warranty its original form or of the quality, # modified, was distributed or delivered to or # performance, merchantability and fitness received by a user from for a particular purpose of # any person, organization or entity other # the program and the nonexistence of any than ICOT, unless it makes or infringement or violation of # grants independently of ICOT any specific # any right of any third party. warranty to the user in # # writing, such person, organization or entity, # Each user of the program will agree and will also be exempted understand, and be deemed to # from and not be held liable to the user for # have agreed and understood, that there is any such damages as noted no warranty whatsoever for # above as far as the program is concerned. # the program and, accordingly, the entire # risk arising from or # ------COPYING.ipadic-----END- # otherwise connected with the program is ------assumed by the user.
# 3. Lao Word Break Dictionary Data (laodict.txt) # Therefore, neither ICOT, the copyright holder, or any other # organization that participated in or was Copyright (c) 2013 International Business Machines otherwise related to the Corporation and others. All Rights Reserved. # development of the program and their Project: http://code.google.com/p/lao- respective officials, directors, dictionary/ # officers and other employees shall be held Dictionary: http://lao- liable for any and all dictionary.googlecode.com/git/Lao-Dictionary.txt # damages, including, without limitation, License: http://lao-dictionary.googlecode.com/g general, special, incidental it/Lao-Dictionary-LICEN # and consequential damages, arising out of (copied below) or otherwise in connection This file is derived from the above dictionary, with # with the use or inability to use the program slight modifications. or any product, material ------# or result produced or otherwise obtained ------by using the program,
123 Copyright (C) 2013 Brian Eugene Wilson, Robert Copyright (c) 2013, LeRoy Benjamin Sharon Martin Campbell. All rights reserved. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided with or without modifi that the following conditions are met: cation, are permitted provided that the following Redistributions of source code must retain the above conditions are met: copyright no Redistributions of source code must retain the above tice, this list of conditions and the following copyright notice, disclaimer. Redistributions this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of cond Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notic itions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materi e, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation an als provided with the distribution. d/or other materials provided with the distribution.
Neither the name Myanmar Karen Word Lists, nor THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT the names of its contributors may be used to HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY endorse or promote products derived from this EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, software without specific prior written permission. BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS I EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR S" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMP INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES LIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVIC DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED A ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DA ND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT MAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVIC (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF ES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED A THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. ND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT ------(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE 4. Burmese Word Break Dictionary Data POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. (burmesedict.txt) ------Copyright (c) 2014 International Business Machines Corporation and others. All Rights Reserved. 5. Time Zone Database This list is part of a project hosted at: github.com/kanyawtech/myanmar-karen-word-lists ICU uses the public domain data and code derived ------from Time Zone Database ------for its time zone support. The ownership of the TZ database is explained
124 in BCP 175: Procedure for Maintaining the Time distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Zone Database section 7. Materials, and to permit persons to whom the Materials are furnished to do so, subject to 1 - Database Ownership the following conditions:
The TZ database itself is not an IETF Contribution or an IETF The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included document. Rather it is a pre-existing and regularly updated work in all copies or substantial portions of the Materials. that is in the public domain, and is intended to remain in the public THE MATERIALS ARE PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT domain. Therefore, BCPs 78 [RFC5378] and 79 WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, [RFC3979] do not apply EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT to the TZ Database or contributions that LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF individuals make to it. MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR Should any claims be made and substantiated PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. against the TZ Database, IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT the organization that is providing the IANA HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY Considerations defined in CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER this RFC, under the memorandum of IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, understanding with the IETF, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR currently ICANN, may act in accordance with all IN CONNECTION WITH THE competent court MATERIALS OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN orders. No ownership claims will be made by THE MATERIALS. ICANN or the IETF Trust
on the database or the code. Any person making a contribution to the SGI FREE SOFTWARE LICENSE B (Version 2.0, Sept. database or code waives all rights to future claims 18, 2008) in that
contribution or in the TZ Database. Copyright (C) 1992 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All Rights
Reserved. google-jstemplate
URL: http://code.google.com/p/google-jstemplate/ Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of Khronos header files this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in URL: http://www.khronos.org/registry the Software without restriction, including without
limitation the rights to Copyright (c) 2007-2010 The Khronos Group Inc. use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the person obtaining a Software is furnished to do copy of this software and/or associated so, subject to the following conditions: documentation files (the
"Materials"), to deal in the Materials without The above copyright notice including the dates of first restriction, including publication and either without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, this permission notice or a reference to merge, publish,
125 http://oss.sgi.com/projects/FreeB/ * Neither the name of Google Inc. nor the names of its shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from
this software without specific prior written permission. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL SILICON WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT GRAPHICS, INC. BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT Except as contained in this notice, the name of Silicon Graphics, Inc. shall LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY dealings in this Software without prior written authorization from Silicon THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT Graphics, Inc. (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING
IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE LevelDB: A Fast Persistent Key-Value Store OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE URL: https://github.com/google/leveldb.git POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Copyright (c) 2011 The LevelDB Authors. All rights The library to input, validate, and display reserved. addresses. URL: https://github.com/googlei18n/libaddressinput Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the libjingle following conditions are URL: http://www.webrtc.org met:
libjpeg * Redistributions of source code must retain the URL: http://www.ijg.org/ above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. ------* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the The authors make NO WARRANTY or representation, following disclaimer either express or implied, in the documentation and/or other materials provided with respect to this software, its quality, accuracy, with the merchantability, or
126 fitness for a particular purpose. This software is We specifically permit and encourage the use of this provided "AS IS", and you, software as the basis of its user, assume the entire risk as to its quality and commercial products, provided that all warranty or accuracy. liability claims are assumed by the product vendor. This software is copyright (C) 1991-1998, Thomas G. Lane.
All Rights Reserved except as specified below. sole proprietor of its copyright holder, Aladdin Enterprises of Menlo Park, CA. Permission is hereby granted to use, copy, modify, by the usual distribution terms of the Free Software and distribute this Foundation; principally, software (or portions thereof) for any purpose, that you must include source code if you redistribute without fee, subject to these it. (See the file ansi2knr.c for conditions: full details.) (1) If any part of the source code for this software is However, since ansi2knr.c is not needed as part distributed, then this of any program generated from the IJG code, this README file must be included, with this copyright does not limit you more than and no-warranty notice the foregoing paragraphs do. unaltered; and any additions, deletions, or changes to the original files The Unix configuration script "configure" was must be clearly indicated in accompanying produced with GNU Autoconf. documentation. It is copyright by the Free Software Foundation but is (2) If only executable code is distributed, then the freely distributable. accompanying The same holds for its supporting scripts documentation must state that "this software is based (config.guess, config.sub, in part on the work of ltconfig, ltmain.sh). Another support script, install-sh, the Independent JPEG Group". is copyright (3) Permission for use of this software is granted only by M.I.T. but is also freely distributable. if the user accepts full responsibility for any undesirable consequences; the authors accept It appears that the arithmetic coding option of the JPEG spec is covered by NO LIABILITY for damages of any kind. patents owned by IBM, AT&T, and Mitsubishi. Hence
arithmetic coding cannot These conditions apply to any software derived from legally be used without obtaining one or more or based on the IJG code, licenses. For this reason, not just to the unmodified library. If you use our support for arithmetic coding has been removed from work, you ought to the free JPEG software. acknowledge us. (Since arithmetic coding provides only a marginal gain over the unpatented Permission is NOT granted for the use of any IJG Huffman mode, it is unlikely that very many author's name or company name implementations will support it.) in advertising or publicity relating to this software or So far as we are aware, there are no patent products derived from it. restrictions on the remaining This software may be referred to only as "the Independent JPEG Group's The IJG distribution formerly included code to read software". and write GIF files. To avoid entanglement with the Unisys LZW patent,
127 GIF reading support has - Neither the name of the libjpeg-turbo Project nor the names of its been removed altogether, and the GIF writer has been simplified to produce contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this "uncompressed GIFs". This technique does not use the LZW algorithm; the software without specific prior written permission. resulting GIF files are larger than usual, but are readable by all standard THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT GIF decoders. HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS", AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE We are required to state that IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND "The Graphics Interchange Format(c) is the FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Copyright property of ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE CompuServe Incorporated. GIF(sm) is a Service COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE Mark property of LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, CompuServe Incorporated." SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT ------LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF ------SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY Public License. THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) libjpeg-turbo ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS URL: http://sourceforge.net/projects/libjpeg-turbo/ SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. libjpeg-turbo is licensed under a non-restrictive, BSD- style license International Phone Number Library (see README.) The TurboJPEG/OSS wrapper (both C and Java versions) and URL: http://libphonenumber.googlecode.com/svn/trunk/ associated test programs bear a similar license, which is reproduced below: Copyright (C) 2011 Google Inc. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the modification, are permitted provided that the "License"); following conditions are met: you may not use this file except in compliance with the License. - Redistributions of source code must retain the You may obtain a copy of the License at above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 - Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in writing, software the documentation distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS and/or other materials provided with the IS" BASIS, distribution. WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY
128 KIND, either express or implied. efforts or the library will fulfill any of your particular purposes See the License for the specific language governing permissions and or needs. This library is provided with all faults, and the entire limitations under the License. risk of satisfactory quality, performance, accuracy,
and effort is with libpng the user. URL: http://libpng.org/
libpng versions 0.97, January 1998, through 1.0.6, This copy of the libpng notices is provided for your March 20, 2000, are convenience. In case of Copyright (c) 1998-2000 Glenn Randers-Pehrson, are any discrepancy between this copy and the notices in derived from the file png.h that is libpng-0.96, and are distributed according to the included in the libpng distribution, the latter shall same disclaimer and prevail. license as libpng-0.96, with the following individuals added to the list COPYRIGHT NOTICE, DISCLAIMER, and LICENSE: of Contributing Authors:
If you modify libpng you may insert additional notices Tom Lane immediately following Glenn Randers-Pehrson this sentence. Willem van Schaik
libpng versions 0.89, June 1996, through 0.96, May This code is released under the libpng license. 1997, are Copyright (c) 1996-1997 Andreas Dilger, are derived libpng versions 1.0.7, July 1, 2000, through 1.2.54, from libpng-0.88, November 12, 2015, are and are distributed according to the same disclaimer Copyright (c) 2000-2002, 2004, 2006-2015 Glenn and license as Randers-Pehrson, are libpng-0.88, with the following individuals added to derived from libpng-1.0.6, and are distributed the list of according to the same Contributing Authors: disclaimer and license as libpng-1.0.6 with the following individuals John Bowler added to the list of Contributing Authors: Kevin Bracey
Sam Bushell Simon-Pierre Cadieux Magnus Holmgren Eric S. Raymond Greg Roelofs Cosmin Truta Tom Tanner Gilles Vollant
libpng versions 0.5, May 1995, through 0.88, January and with the following additions to the disclaimer: 1996, are Copyright (c) 1995-1996 Guy Eric Schalnat, Group 42, There is no warranty against interference with your Inc. enjoyment of the library or against infringement. There is no For the purposes of this copyright and license, warranty that our "Contributing Authors"
129 is defined as the following set of individuals: source code in a product, acknowledgment is not required but would be
Andreas Dilger END OF COPYRIGHT NOTICE, DISCLAIMER, and Dave Martindale LICENSE. Guy Eric Schalnat
Paul Schmidt A "png_get_copyright" function is available, for Tim Wegner convenient use in "about" boxes and the like: The PNG Reference Library is supplied "AS IS". The Contributing Authors printf("%s", png_get_copyright(NULL)); and Group 42, Inc. disclaim all warranties, expressed or implied, Also, the PNG logo (in PNG format, of course) is including, without limitation, the warranties of supplied in the merchantability and of files "pngbar.png.jpg" and "pngbar.jpg (88x31) and fitness for any purpose. The Contributing Authors "pngnow.png.jpg" (98x31). and Group 42, Inc. assume no liability for direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, Libpng is OSI Certified Open Source Software. OSI Certified Open Source is or consequential damages, which may result from the use of the PNG a certification mark of the Open Source Initiative. OSI has not addressed Reference Library, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. the additional disclaimers inserted at version 1.0.7.
Permission is hereby granted to use, copy, modify, Glenn Randers-Pehrson and distribute this glennrp at users.sourceforge.net source code, or portions hereof, for any purpose, November 12, 2015 without fee, subject to the following restrictions: libsrtp
URL: https://github.com/cisco/libsrtp 1. The origin of this source code must not be misrepresented. /* 2. Altered versions must be plainly marked as such * and must not * Copyright (c) 2001-2006 Cisco Systems, Inc. be misrepresented as being the original source. * All rights reserved. * 3. This Copyright notice may not be removed or * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, altered from any with or without source or altered source distribution. * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. * are met: specifically permit, without * fee, and encourage the use of this source code as a * Redistributions of source code must retain the component to above copyright supporting the PNG file format in commercial * notice, this list of conditions and the following products. If you use this disclaimer.
130 * * Redistributions in binary form must reproduce Copyright (c) 2010, The WebM Project authors. All the above rights reserved. * copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, * disclaimer in the documentation and/or other with or without materials provided modification, are permitted provided that the * with the distribution. following conditions are * met: * Neither the name of the Cisco Systems, Inc. nor the names of its * Redistributions of source code must retain the * contributors may be used to endorse or above copyright promote products derived notice, this list of conditions and the following * from this software without specific prior written disclaimer. permission.
* * Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE above copyright COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS notice, this list of conditions and the following * "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED disclaimer in WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT the documentation and/or other materials * LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF provided with the MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS distribution. * FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE * Neither the name of Google, nor the WebM * COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE Project, nor the names LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, of its contributors may be used to endorse or * INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, promote products OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES derived from this software without specific prior * (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, written PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR permission. * SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) * HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS * STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT * ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR * OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT * HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY */ DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL libusbx DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT URL: http://libusb.org LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) libvpx HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY URL: http://www.webmproject.org
131 THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, for these implementations of WebM shall terminate STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT as of the date such (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING litigation is filed. IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE libxml POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. URL: http://xmlsoft.org
Except where otherwise noted in the source code WebP image encoder/decoder (e.g. the files hash.c, URL: http://developers.google.com/speed/webp with different Copyright notices) all the files are:
Additional IP Rights Grant (Patents) Copyright (C) 1998-2012 Daniel Veillard. All Rights ------Reserved.
"These implementations" means the copyrightable Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any works that implement the WebM person obtaining a copy codecs distributed by Google as part of the WebM of this software and associated documentation files Project. (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights Google hereby grants to you a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell royalty-free, irrevocable (except as stated in this section) patent license to copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is fur- make, have made, use, offer to sell, sell, import, transfer, and otherwise nished to do so, subject to the following conditions: run, modify and propagate the contents of these implementations of WebM, where The above copyright notice and this permission such license applies only to those patent claims, both notice shall be included in currently owned by all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Google and acquired in the future, licensable by
Google that are necessarily THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT infringed by these implementations of WebM. This WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR grant does not include claims IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE that would be infringed only as a consequence of WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FIT- further modification of these NESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND or agree to the institution of patent litigation or any NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE other patent AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR enforcement activity against any entity (including a ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER cross-claim or LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that any of these TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, implementations of WebM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE or any code incorporated within any of these OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN implementations of WebM THE SOFTWARE. constitute direct or contributory patent infringement, or inducement of patent infringement, then any patent rights granted to libxslt you under this License URL: http://xmlsoft.org/XSLT
132 ------Licence for libxslt except libexslt Copyright (C) 2001-2002 Thomas Broyer, Charlie ------Bozeman and Daniel Veillard. ------All Rights Reserved. Copyright (C) 2001-2002 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is fur- copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is fur- nished to do so, subject to the following conditions: nished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. all copies or substantial portions of the Software. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FIT- IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FIT- NESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE NESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER DANIEL VEILLARD BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CON- IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CON- NECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. NECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. Except as contained in this notice, the name of the authors shall not Except as contained in this notice, the name of Daniel Veillard shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other deal- be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other deal- ings in this Software without prior written authorization from him. ings in this Software without prior written authorization from him. ------
------libyuv URL: http://code.google.com/p/libyuv/ Licence for libexslt
133 Copyright 2011 The LibYuv Project Authors. All rights OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE reserved. POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, linux-syscall-support with or without URL: http://code.google.com/p/linux-syscall- modification, are permitted provided that the support/ following conditions are met: // Copyright 2015 The Chromium Authors. All rights reserved. * Redistributions of source code must retain the // above copyright // Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, notice, this list of conditions and the following with or without disclaimer. // modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are * Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the // met: above copyright // notice, this list of conditions and the following // * Redistributions of source code must retain disclaimer in the above copyright the documentation and/or other materials // notice, this list of conditions and the following provided with the disclaimer. distribution. // * Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above * Neither the name of Google nor the names of its // copyright notice, this list of conditions and the contributors may following disclaimer be used to endorse or promote products derived // in the documentation and/or other materials from this software provided with the without specific prior written permission. // distribution. // * Neither the name of Google Inc. nor the names of its THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS // contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT // this software without specific prior written permission. LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR // A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO // THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY // "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL // LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE // A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) // OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, // SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING // LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
134 // DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY OF SUCH DAMAGE. // THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT LZMA SDK // (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) URL: http://www.7-zip.org/sdk.html ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE LZMA SDK is placed in the public domain. // OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. mesa LZ4 - Extremely fast compression URL: http://www.mesa3d.org/ URL: https://code.google.com/p/lz4/ The default Mesa license is as follows: LZ4 Library Copyright (c) 2011-2014, Yann Collet Copyright (C) 1999-2007 Brian Paul All Rights Reserved. All rights reserved.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, person obtaining a with or without modification, copy of this software and associated documentation are permitted provided that the following conditions files (the "Software"), are met: to deal in the Software without restriction, including
without limitation * Redistributions of source code must retain the the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, above copyright notice, this distribute, sublicense, list of conditions and the following disclaimer. and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the * Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the above copyright notice, this following conditions: list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or The above copyright notice and this permission other materials provided with the distribution. notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES BRIAN PAUL BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING Some parts of Mesa are copyrighted under the GNU IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
135 LGPL. See the * A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT Mesa/docs/COPYRIGHT file for details. * OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, modp base64 decoder * SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL URL: https://github.com/client9/stringencoders DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT * LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE * MODP_B64 - High performance base64 GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, encoder/decoder * DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS * Version 1.3 -- 17-Mar-2006 INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY * http://modp.com/release/base64 * THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT * * (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) * Copyright (c) 2005, 2006 Nick Galbreath -- nickg ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE [at] modp [dot] com * OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE * All rights reserved. POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. * * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, Mojo with or without URL: https://github.com/domokit/mojo * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are * met: // Copyright 2014 The Chromium Authors. All rights reserved. * // * Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright // Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. // modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are * // met: * Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright // * notice, this list of conditions and the following // * Redistributions of source code must retain disclaimer in the the above copyright * documentation and/or other materials provided // notice, this list of conditions and the following with the distribution. disclaimer. * // * Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above * Neither the name of the modp.com nor the names of its // copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer * contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from // in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the * this software without specific prior written permission. // distribution. * // * Neither the name of Google Inc. nor the names of its * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS // contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from * "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT // this software without specific prior written permission. * LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR //
136 // THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS above copyright // "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED notice, this list of conditions and the WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT following disclaimer. // LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce // A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO the above copyright EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT notice, this list of conditions and the // OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY following disclaimer in the DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, documentation and/or other materials // SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL provided with the distribution. DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
// LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE 3. The names of its contributors may not be GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, used to endorse or promote // DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS products derived from this software without INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY specific prior written // THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, permission. STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
// (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS // OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF mt19937ar MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR URL: http://www.math.sci.hiroshima-u.ac.jp/~m- A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN mat/MT/MT2002/emt19937ar.html NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, A C-program for MT19937, with initialization INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, improved 2002/1/26. EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES Coded by Takuji Nishimura and Makoto (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, Matsumoto. PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR Before using, initialize the state by using PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) init_genrand(seed) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF or init_by_array(init_key, key_length). LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY Copyright (C) 1997 - 2002, Makoto Matsumoto WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS and Takuji Nishimura, SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE All rights POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. reserved.
Netscape Plugin Application Programming Interface Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, (NPAPI) with or without URL: http://mxr.mozilla.org/mozilla- modification, are permitted provided that the central/source/modules/plugin/base/public/ following conditions
are met: Version: MPL 1.1/GPL 2.0/LGPL 2.1
137 The contents of this file are subject to the Mozilla URL: Public License Version https://silver.arm.com/download/Software/Graphics/ OX000-BU-00010-r1p0-00bet0/OX000-BU-00010 the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at -r1p0-00bet0.tgz http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/
Use of this source code is governed by a BSD-style Software distributed under the License is distributed license that can be on an "AS IS" basis, found in the LICENSE file in the root of the source WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express tree. All or implied. See the License contributing project authors may be found in the for the specific language governing rights and AUTHORS file in the limitations under the root of the source tree.
The Original Code is mozilla.org code. The files were originally licensed by ARM Limited.
The Initial Developer of the Original Code is The following files: Netscape Communications Corporation.
Portions created by the Initial Developer are * dl/api/omxtypes.h Copyright (C) 1998 * dl/sp/api/omxSP.h the Initial Developer. All Rights Reserved.
are licensed by Khronos: Contributor(s):
Copyright © 2005-2008 The Khronos Group Inc. All Alternatively, the contents of this file may be used Rights Reserved. under the terms of either the GNU General Public License Version 2 or later (the "GPL"), or These materials are protected by copyright laws and contain material the GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2.1 or later (the "LGPL"), proprietary to the Khronos Group, Inc. You may use these materials in which case the provisions of the GPL or the LGPL are applicable instead for implementing Khronos specifications, without altering or removing of those above. If you wish to allow use of your version of this file only any trademark, copyright or other notice from the specification. under the terms of either the GPL or the LGPL, and not to allow others to use your version of this file under the terms of the Khronos Group makes no, and expressly disclaims MPL, indicate your any, representations decision by deleting the provisions above and replace or warranties, express or implied, regarding these them with the notice materials, including, and other provisions required by the GPL or the LGPL. without limitation, any implied warranties of If you do not delete merchantability or fitness the provisions above, a recipient may use your for a particular purpose or non-infringement of any version of this file under intellectual property. the terms of any one of the MPL, the GPL or the Khronos Group makes no, and expressly disclaims LGPL. any, warranties, express or implied, regarding the correctness, accuracy, completeness, timeliness, OpenMAX DL and reliability of these materials.
138 prior written Under no circumstances will the Khronos Group, or any of its Promoters, THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT Contributors or Members or their respective partners, HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS officers, directors, ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED employees, agents or representatives be liable for WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT any damages, whether LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF direct, indirect, special or consequential damages for MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR lost revenues, A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO lost profits, or otherwise, arising from or in connection EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER with these OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, Khronos and OpenMAX are trademarks of the EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES Khronos Group Inc. (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR opus PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER URL: http://git.xiph.org/?p=opus.git CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF Copyright 2001-2011 Xiph.Org, Skype Limited, Octasic, LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT Jean-Marc Valin, Timothy LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING B. Terriberry, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY CSIRO, Gregory Maxwell, OUT OF THE USE OF THIS Mark Borgerding, SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY Erik de Castro Lopo OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, Opus is subject to the royalty-free patent licenses with or without which are modification, are permitted provided that the specified at: following conditions https://datatracker.ietf.org/ipr/1524/ are met:
Microsoft Corporation: - Redistributions of source code must retain the https://datatracker.ietf.org/ipr/1914/ above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. Broadcom Corporation: https://datatracker.ietf.org/ipr/1526/ - Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright OTS (OpenType Sanitizer) notice, this list of conditions and the following URL: https://github.com/khaledhosny/ots.git disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. PLY (Python Lex-Yacc) URL: http://www.dabeaz.com/ply/ply-3.4.tar.gz - Neither the name of Internet Society, IETF or IETF PLY (Python Lex-Yacc) Trust, nor the Version 3.4 names of specific contributors, may be used to endorse or promote Protocol Buffers products derived from this software without specific
139 URL: http://protobuf.googlecode.com/svn/trunk re2 - an efficient, principled regular expression library Code generated by the Protocol Buffer compiler is owned by the owner URL: https://github.com/google/re2 of the input file used when generating it. This code is not sfntly standalone and requires a support library to be linked URL: https://github.com/googlei18n/sfntly with it. This support library is itself covered by the above license. Skia
URL: https://skia.org/ Quick Color Management System
URL: https://github.com/jrmuizel/qcms/tree/v4 ------
------qcms Some files under resources are under the following Copyright (C) 2009 Mozilla Corporation license: Copyright (C) 1998-2007 Marti Maria Unlimited Commercial Use Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any We try to make it clear that you may use all clipart person obtaining from Openclipart even for unlimited commercial use. We believe that giving away our images is a great way a copy of this software and associated to share with the world our talents and that will come documentation files (the "Software"), back around in a better form. to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation May I Use Openclipart for? the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, We put together a small chart of as many possibilities and questions we have heard from people asking and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit how they may use Openclipart. If you have an persons to whom the Software additional question, please email is furnished to do so, subject to the following [email protected]. conditions:
All Clipart are Released into the Public Domain. The above copyright notice and this permission Each artist at Openclipart releases all rights to the notice shall be included in images they share at Openclipart. The reason is so all copies or substantial portions of the Software. that there is no friction in using and sharing images authors make available at this website so that each artist might also receive the same benefit in using THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT other artists clipart totally for any possible reason. WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO SMHasher THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS URL: http://code.google.com/p/smhasher/ FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER Snappy: A fast compressor/decompressor LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION URL: http://google.github.io/snappy/ OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING
FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION sqlite WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. URL: http://sqlite.org/
140 The author disclaims copyright to this source code. CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, In place of a legal notice, here is a blessing: INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE May you do good and not evil. GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR May you find forgiveness for yourself and forgive PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER others. CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR May you share freely, never taking more than you TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) give. ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. tcmalloc
URL: http://gperftools.googlecode.com/ usrsctp
URL: http://github.com/sctplab/usrsctp The USB ID Repository
URL: http://www.linux-usb.org/usb-ids.html (Copied from the COPYRIGHT file of
https://code.google.com/p/sctp- Copyright (c) 2012, Linux USB Project refimpl/source/browse/trunk/COPYRIGHT) All rights reserved. ------Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided Copyright (c) 2001, 2002 Cisco Systems, Inc. that the following conditions are met: Copyright (c) 2002-12 Randall R. Stewart
Copyright (c) 2002-12 Michael Tuexen o Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, All rights reserved. this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without o Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the are met: documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. o Neither the name of the Linux USB Project nor the notice, this list of conditions and the following names of its disclaimer in the contributors may be used to endorse or promote documentation and/or other materials provided products derived from with the distribution. this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
141 FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT --- LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF The above is the version of the MIT "Expat" License ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF used by X.org: SUCH DAMAGE.
http://cgit.freedesktop.org/xorg/xserver/tree/COPYIN wayland G URL: http://wayland.freedesktop.org/
wayland-protocols Copyright © 2008-2012 Kristian Høgsberg URL: http://wayland.freedesktop.org/ Copyright © 2010-2012 Intel Corporation
Copyright © 2011 Benjamin Franzke Copyright © 2008-2013 Kristian Høgsberg Copyright © 2012 Collabora, Ltd. Copyright © 2010-2013 Intel Corporation
Copyright © 2013 Rafael Antognolli Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any Copyright © 2013 Jasper St. Pierre person obtaining a Copyright © 2014 Jonas Ådahl copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), Copyright © 2014 Jason Ekstrand to deal in the Software without restriction, including Copyright © 2014-2015 Collabora, Ltd. without limitation Copyright © 2015 Red Hat Inc. the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit person obtaining a persons to whom the copy of this software and associated documentation Software is furnished to do so, subject to the files (the "Software"), following conditions: to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation The above copyright notice and this permission the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, notice (including the next distribute, sublicense, paragraph) shall be included in all copies or and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit substantial portions of the persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT following conditions: WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE The above copyright notice and this permission WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, notice (including the next FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND paragraph) shall be included in all copies or NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL substantial portions of the THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE
142 above copyright THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT notice, this list of conditions and the following WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR disclaimer in IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE the documentation and/or other materials WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, provided with the FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND distribution. NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE * Neither the name of Google nor the names of its FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER contributors may LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, be used to endorse or promote products derived TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING from this software FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE without specific prior written permission. SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER
DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS --- "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT The above is the version of the MIT "Expat" License LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF used by X.org: MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT http://cgit.freedesktop.org/xorg/xserver/tree/COPYIN HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY G DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT Web Animations JS LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE URL: https://github.com/web-animations/web- GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, animations-js DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY WebRTC THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, URL: http://www.webrtc.org STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING Copyright (c) 2011, The WebRTC project authors. All IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE rights reserved. OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without x86inc modification, are permitted provided that the URL: following conditions are http://git.videolan.org/?p=x264.git;a=blob;f=common/ met: x86/x86inc.asm
* Redistributions of source code must retain the ;********************************************************* above copyright ******************** notice, this list of conditions and the following ;* x86inc.asm disclaimer. ;********************************************************* ******************** * Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the ;* Copyright (C) 2005-2011 x264 project
143 ;* encourage contributing a patch ;* Authors: Loren Merritt
;********************************************************* ******************** 1. The origin of this software must not be misrepresented; you must not
claim that you wrote the original software. If ; This is a header file for the x264ASM assembly you use this software language, which uses in a product, an acknowledgment in the product ; NASM/YASM syntax combined with a large number documentation would be of macros to provide easy appreciated but is not required. ; abstraction between different calling conventions (x86_32, win64, linux64). 2. Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such, and must not be ; It also has various other useful features to simplify writing the kind of misrepresented as being the original software. ; DSP functions that are most often used in x264. 3. This notice may not be removed or altered from any source distribution.
; Unlike the rest of x264, this file is available under an ISC license, as it Jean-loup Gailly ; has significant usefulness outside of x264 and we Mark Adler want it to be available ; to the largest audience possible. Of course, if you */ modify it for your own
; purposes to add a new feature, we strongly
144 STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT url_parse (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE URL: http://mxr.mozilla.org/comm-central/source/m ozilla/netwerk/base/src/nsURLParsers.cpp OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Copyright 2007, Google Inc. ------All rights reserved. ------
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, The file url_parse.cc is based on nsURLParsers.cc with or without from Mozilla. This file is modification, are permitted provided that the licensed separately as follows: following conditions are met: The contents of this file are subject to the Mozilla
Public License Version * Redistributions of source code must retain the the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at above copyright http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/ notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. * Redistributions in binary form must reproduce Software distributed under the License is distributed the above on an "AS IS" basis, copyright notice, this list of conditions and the WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express following disclaimer or implied. See the License in the documentation and/or other materials provided for the specific language governing rights and with the limitations under the * Neither the name of Google Inc. nor the names of its The Original Code is mozilla.org code. contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from The Initial Developer of the Original Code is this software without specific prior written permission. Netscape Communications Corporation.
Portions created by the Initial Developer are THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT Copyright (C) 1998 HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS the Initial Developer. All Rights Reserved. "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF Contributor(s): MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR Darin Fisher (original author) A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT Alternatively, the contents of this file may be used OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY under the terms of DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, either the GNU General Public License Version 2 or SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL later (the "GPL"), or DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT the GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2.1 or LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE later (the "LGPL"), GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, in which case the provisions of the GPL or the LGPL DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) are applicable instead HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY of those above. If you wish to allow use of your THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, version of this file only
145 under the terms of either the GPL or the LGPL, and assembler.cc and assembler.h. not to allow others to This code is copyrighted by Sun Microsystems use your version of this file under the terms of the Inc. and released MPL, indicate your under a 3-clause BSD license. decision by deleting the provisions above and replace them with the notice - Valgrind client API header, located at and other provisions required by the GPL or the LGPL. third_party/valgrind/valgrind.h If you do not delete This is release under the BSD license. the provisions above, a recipient may use your version of this file under the terms of any one of the MPL, the GPL or the These libraries have their own licenses; we LGPL. recommend you read them, as their terms may differ from the terms below. V8 JavaScript Engine URL: http://code.google.com/p/v8 Further license information can be found in LICENSE files located in
sub-directories. This license applies to all parts of V8 that are not externally maintained libraries. The externally maintained Copyright 2014, the V8 project authors. All rights libraries used by V8 reserved. are: Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the - PCRE test suite, located in following conditions are test/mjsunit/third_party/regexp-pcre/regexp- met: pcre.js. This is based on the
test suite from PCRE-7.3, which is copyrighted by the University * Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright of Cambridge and Google, Inc. The copyright notice and license notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. are embedded in regexp-pcre.js. * Redistributions in binary form must reproduce
the above - Layout tests, located in copyright notice, this list of conditions and the test/mjsunit/third_party/object-keys. These are following based on layout tests from webkit.org which are disclaimer in the documentation and/or other copyrighted by materials provided Apple Computer, Inc. and released under a with the distribution. 3-clause BSD license. * Neither the name of Google Inc. nor the names
of its - Strongtalk assembler, the basis of the files contributors may be used to endorse or assembler-arm-inl.h, promote products derived assembler-arm.cc, assembler-arm.h, assembler- from this software without specific prior ia32-inl.h, written permission. assembler-ia32.cc, assembler-ia32.h, assembler- x64-inl.h, THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT assembler-x64.cc, assembler-x64.h, assembler- HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS mips-inl.h, "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED assembler-mips.cc, assembler-mips.h, WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
146 LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR - Redistribution in binary form must reproduce the A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO above copyright EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT notice, this list of conditions and the following OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY disclaimer in the DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, documentation and/or other materials provided with SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL the distribution. DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE - Neither the name of Sun Microsystems or the names GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, of contributors may DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) be used to endorse or promote products derived from HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY this software without THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, specific prior written permission. STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY fdlibm AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR URL: http://www.netlib.org/fdlibm/ PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR Copyright (C) 1993-2004 by Sun Microsystems, Inc. CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, All rights reserved. INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, Developed at SunSoft, a Sun Microsystems, Inc. business. PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER software is freely granted, provided that this notice CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF is preserved. LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING Strongtalk NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY URL: http://www.strongtalk.org/ OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Copyright (c) 1994-2006 Sun Microsystems Inc.
All Rights Reserved. Extra bundled binaries
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without name License modification, are permitted provided that the libcap following conditions are URL: https://sites.google.com/site/fullycapable/ met: Unless otherwise *explicitly* stated, the following text describes the - Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, licensed conditions under which the contents of this libcap release this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
147 may be used and distributed: INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR ------TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE Redistribution and use in source and binary forms of libcap, with USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. or without modification, are permitted provided that the following ------conditions are met:
libnsspem notice, and this entire permission notice in its entirety, URL: https://git.fedorahosted.org/cgit/nss-pem.git including the disclaimer of warranties. /* ***** BEGIN LICENSE BLOCK ***** copyright notices, this list of conditions, and the * Version: MPL 1.1/GPL 2.0/LGPL 2.1 following * disclaimer in the documentation and/or other * The contents of this file are subject to the Mozilla materials provided Public License Version with the distribution. * 1.1 (the "License"); you may not use this file except in compliance with products derived from this software without their * the License. You may obtain a copy of the License specific prior at written permission. * http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/ * ALTERNATIVELY, this product may be distributed * Software distributed under the License is under the terms of the distributed on an "AS IS" basis, GNU General Public License (v2.0 - see below), in * WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either which case the express or implied. See the License provisions of the GNU GPL are required INSTEAD OF * for the specific language governing rights and the above restrictions. limitations under the (This clause is necessary due to a potential conflict * License. between the GNU GPL and the restrictions contained * in a BSD-style * The Original Code is the Netscape security libraries.
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND ANY * The Initial Developer of the Original Code is EXPRESS OR IMPLIED * Netscape Communications Corporation. WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF * Portions created by the Initial Developer are Copyright (C) 1994-2000 MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. * the Initial Developer. All Rights Reserved. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR(S) BE LIABLE FOR * ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, * Contributor(s): INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR * Rob Crittenden ([email protected]) CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, * BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS * Alternatively, the contents of this file may be used under the terms of OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
148 * either the GNU General Public License Version 2 or MIT LICENSE later (the "GPL"), or Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any * the GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2.1 person obtaining or later (the "LGPL"), a copy of this software and associated * in which case the provisions of the GPL or the documentation files (the LGPL are applicable instead "Software"), to deal in the Software without * of those above. If you wish to allow use of your restriction, including version of this file only without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, * under the terms of either the GPL or the LGPL, and merge, publish, not to allow others to distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the * use your version of this file under the terms of the Software, and to MPL, indicate your permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to * decision by deleting the provisions above and do so, subject to replace them with the notice the following conditions: * and other provisions required by the GPL or the
LGPL. If you do not delete The above copyright notice and this permission * the provisions above, a recipient may use your notice shall be included version of this file under in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. * the terms of any one of the MPL, the GPL or the LGPL. * ***** END LICENSE BLOCK ***** */ THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT Return to Documentation index. LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF © Opera TV AS 2015. Confidential information of MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR Opera TV. PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY BSD LICENSE CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR that the following conditions are met: IN CONNECTION WITH THE THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR THE SOFTWARE. IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A ______PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, This copy of the libpng notices is provided for your SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL convenience. In case of DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, any discrepancy between this copy and the notices in PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR the file png.h that is SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND included in the libpng distribution, the latter shall ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN prevail. CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF COPYRIGHT NOTICE, DISCLAIMER, and LICENSE: ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. ______If you modify libpng you may insert additional notices immediately following
149 this sentence. distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng-0.96,
with the following individuals added to the list of This code is released under the libpng license. Contributing Authors:
libpng versions 1.2.6, August 15, 2004, through 1.4.1, Tom Lane February 25, 2010, are Glenn Randers-Pehrson Copyright (c) 2004, 2006-2007 Glenn Randers- Pehrson, and are Willem van Schaik distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng-1.2.5 libpng versions 0.89, June 1996, through 0.96, May with the following individual added to the list of 1997, are Contributing Authors Copyright (c) 1996, 1997 Andreas Dilger
Distributed according to the same disclaimer and Cosmin Truta license as libpng-0.88, with the following individuals added to the list of Contributing Authors: libpng versions 1.0.7, July 1, 2000, through 1.2.5 - October 3, 2002, are Copyright (c) 2000-2002 Glenn Randers-Pehrson, John Bowler and are Kevin Bracey distributed according to the same disclaimer and Sam Bushell license as libpng-1.0.6 Magnus Holmgren with the following individuals added to the list of Contributing Authors Greg Roelofs Tom Tanner Simon-Pierre Cadieux Eric S. Raymond libpng versions 0.5, May 1995, through 0.88, January 1996, are Gilles Vollant Copyright (c) 1995, 1996 Guy Eric Schalnat, Group 42,
Inc. and with the following additions to the disclaimer:
For the purposes of this copyright and license, There is no warranty against interference with your "Contributing Authors" enjoyment of the is defined as the following set of individuals: library or against infringement. There is no warranty that our Andreas Dilger efforts or the library will fulfill any of your particular purposes Dave Martindale or needs. This library is provided with all faults, Guy Eric Schalnat and the entire Paul Schmidt risk of satisfactory quality, performance, accuracy, Tim Wegner and effort is with
the user. The PNG Reference Library is supplied "AS IS". The Contributing Authors libpng versions 0.97, January 1998, through 1.0.6, and Group 42, Inc. disclaim all warranties, expressed March 20, 2000, are or implied, Copyright (c) 1998, 1999 Glenn Randers-Pehrson, and including, without limitation, the warranties of are merchantability and of
150 fitness for any purpose. The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. assume no liability for direct, indirect, incidental, ______special, exemplary, This software is based in part on the work of the or consequential damages, which may result from the FreeType Team. use of the PNG ------Reference Library, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. The FreeType Project LICENSE Permission is hereby granted to use, copy, modify, and distribute this ------source code, or portions hereof, for any purpose, without fee, subject to the following restrictions: 2006-Jan-27
be misrepresented as being the original source. Copyright 1996-2002, 2006 by
David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and source or altered source distribution. Werner Lemberg
The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. Introduction specifically permit, without ======fee, and encourage the use of this source code as a component to supporting the PNG file format in commercial The FreeType Project is distributed in several products. If you use this archive packages; source code in a product, acknowledgment is not some of them may contain, in addition to the required but would be FreeType font engine, various tools and contributions which rely on, or relate to, the A "png_get_copyright" function is available, for convenient use in "about" FreeType Project. boxes and the like: This license applies to all files found in such packages, and printf("%s",png_get_copyright(NULL)); which do not fall under their own explicit
license. The license Also, the PNG logo (in PNG format, of course) is affects thus the FreeType font engine, supplied in the the test programs, files "pngbar.png.jpg" and "pngbar.jpg (88x31) and documentation and makefiles, at the very least. "pngnow.png.jpg" (98x31).
This license was inspired by the BSD, Libpng is OSI Certified Open Source Software. OSI Artistic, and IJG Certified Open Source is a (Independent JPEG Group) licenses, which all certification mark of the Open Source Initiative. encourage inclusion
and use of free software in commercial and Glenn Randers-Pehrson freeware products glennrp at users.sourceforge.net alike. As a consequence, its main points are that: February 25, 2010
151 o We don't promise that this software works. ------However, we will be Throughout this license, the terms `package', interested in any kind of bug reports. (`as is' `FreeType Project', distribution) and `FreeType archive' refer to the set of files originally o You can use this software for whatever you distributed by the authors (David Turner, want, in parts or Robert Wilhelm, and full form, without having to pay us. (`royalty- Werner Lemberg) as the `FreeType Project', be they free' usage) named as alpha, beta or final release. o You may not pretend that you wrote this software. If you use `You' refers to the licensee, or person using the it, or only parts of it, in a program, you project, where must acknowledge `using' is a generic term including compiling the somewhere in your documentation that project's source you have used the code as well as linking it to form a `program' or FreeType code. (`credits') `executable'. This program is referred to as `a program using the FreeType We specifically permit and encourage the inclusion of this engine'. software, with or without modifications, in commercial products. This license applies to all files distributed in We disclaim all warranties covering The the original FreeType Project and FreeType Project, including all source assume no liability related to The FreeType Project. code, binaries and documentation, unless otherwise stated in the file in its
original, unmodified form as distributed in the Finally, many people asked us for a original archive. preferred form for a If you are unsure whether or not a particular file credit/disclaimer to use in compliance with this is covered by license. We thus this license, you must contact us to verify this. encourage you to use the following text:
The FreeType Project is copyright (C) 1996-2000 """ by David Turner, Portions of this software are copyright ɠ
------Please replace
152 AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS no fee need be paid BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE to us. USE OR THE INABILITY TO
USE, OF THE FREETYPE PROJECT. ------
Neither the FreeType authors and contributors ------nor you shall use This license grants a worldwide, royalty- the name of the other for commercial, advertising, free, perpetual and or promotional irrevocable right and license to use, execute, purposes without specific prior written permission. perform, compile,
display, copy, create derivative works of, We suggest, but do not require, that you use one distribute and or more of the sublicense the FreeType Project (in both source following phrases to refer to this software in your and object code documentation forms) and derivative works thereof for any or advertising materials: `FreeType Project', purpose; and to `FreeType Engine', authorize others to exercise some or all of the `FreeType library', or `FreeType Distribution'. rights granted
herein, subject to the following conditions: As you have not signed this license, you are
not required to o Redistribution of source code must retain accept it. However, as the FreeType this license file Project is copyrighted (`FTL.TXT') unaltered; any additions, material, only this license, or another one deletions or changes to contracted with the the original files must be clearly indicated in authors, grants you the right to use, distribute, accompanying and modify it. documentation. The copyright notices Therefore, by using, distributing, or modifying of the unaltered, the FreeType original files must be preserved in all Project, you indicate that you understand and copies of source accept all the terms files. of this license.
o Redistribution in binary form must provide a ------disclaimer that There are two mailing lists related to FreeType: states that the software is based in part of the work of the FreeType Team, in the distribution o [email protected] documentation. We also encourage you to put an URL to the FreeType Discusses general use and applications of web page in your FreeType, as well as documentation, though this isn't mandatory. future and wanted additions to the library and distribution. These conditions apply to any software derived If you are looking for support, start in this from or based on list if you the FreeType Project, not just the unmodified haven't found anything to help you in the files. If you use documentation. our work, you must acknowledge us. However,
153 o [email protected] transfer of data.
Discusses bugs, as well as engine 1.5. "Executable" means Covered Code in any internals, design issues, form other than Source specific licenses, porting, etc. Code.
Our home page can be found at 1.6. "Initial Developer" means the individual or entity identified
as the Initial Developer in the Source Code http://www.freetype.org notice required by Exhibit
A. --- end of FTL.TXT ---
1.7. "Larger Work" means a work which combines Covered Code or ______portions thereof with code not governed by the MOZILLA PUBLIC terms of this License. LICENSE Version 1.1 1.8. "License" means this document.
1.8.1. "Licensable" means having the right to ------grant, to the maximum extent possible, whether at the time of the 1.0.1. "Commercial Use" means distribution or initial grant or otherwise making the subsequently acquired, any and all of the rights Covered Code available to a third party. conveyed herein.
1.1. "Contributor" means each entity that creates 1.9. "Modifications" means any addition to or or contributes to deletion from the the creation of Modifications. substance or structure of either the Original Code or any previous
Modifications. When Covered Code is released 1.2. "Contributor Version" means the as a series of files, a combination of the Original Modification is: Code, prior Modifications used by a Contributor, and the Modifications A. Any addition to or deletion from the contents of a file made by that particular Contributor. containing Original Code or previous Modifications. 1.3. "Covered Code" means the Original Code or Modifications or the B. Any new file that contains any part of combination of the Original Code and the Original Code or Modifications, in each case previous Modifications. including portions thereof.
1.10. "Original Code" means Source Code of 1.4. "Electronic Distribution Mechanism" means computer software code a mechanism generally which is described in the Source Code notice accepted in the software development required by Exhibit A as community for the electronic
154 Original Code, and which, at the time of its entity. release under this
License is not already Covered Code governed 2.1. The Initial Developer Grant. by this License. The Initial Developer hereby grants You a world-
wide, royalty-free, 1.10.1. "Patent Claims" means any patent non-exclusive license, subject to third party claim(s), now owned or intellectual property hereafter acquired, including without claims: limitation, method, process, (a) under intellectual property rights and apparatus claims, in any patent Licensable (other than patent or by grantor. trademark) Licensable by Initial
Developer to use, reproduce, 1.11. "Source Code" means the preferred form of modify, display, perform, sublicense and the Covered Code for distribute the Original making modifications to it, including all modules Code (or portions thereof) with or it contains, plus without Modifications, and/or any associated interface definition files, scripts as part of a Larger Work; and used to control
compilation and installation of an Executable, or source code (b) under Patents Claims infringed by the making, using or differential comparisons against either the Original Code or another selling of Original Code, to make, have made, use, practice, well known, available Covered Code of the Contributor's choice. The sell, and offer for sale, and/or otherwise dispose of the Source Code can be in a compressed or archival form, provided the Original Code (or portions thereof). appropriate decompression or de-archiving software is widely available (c) the licenses granted in this Section for no charge. 2.1(a) and (b) are effective on the date Initial Developer first distributes 1.12. "You" (or "Your") means an individual or a legal entity Original Code under the terms of this License. exercising rights under, and complying with all of the terms of, this License or a future version of this License (d) Notwithstanding Section 2.1(b) above, issued under Section 6.1. no patent license is For legal entities, "You" includes any entity granted: 1) for code that You delete from which controls, is the Original Code; 2) controlled by, or is under common control with separate from the Original Code; or 3) You. For purposes of for infringements caused this definition, "control" means (a) the power, by: i) the modification of the Original direct or indirect, Code or ii) the to cause the direction or management of such combination of the Original Code with entity, whether by other software or devices. contract or otherwise, or (b) ownership of more than fifty percent 2.2. Contributor Grant. (50%) of the outstanding shares or beneficial Subject to third party intellectual property ownership of such claims, each Contributor
155 hereby grants You a world-wide, royalty-free, by that Contributor with other software non-exclusive license (except as part of the Contributor Version) or other devices; or 4) under Patent Claims (a) under intellectual property rights (other than patent or infringed by Covered Code in the absence of Modifications made by trademark) Licensable by Contributor, to use, reproduce, modify, that Contributor. display, perform, sublicense and distribute the Modifications 3.1. Application of License. created by such Contributor (or portions The Modifications which You create or to which thereof) either on an You contribute are unmodified basis, with other governed by the terms of this License, including Modifications, as Covered Code without limitation and/or as part of a Larger Work; and Section 2.2. The Source Code version of Covered Code may be (b) under Patent Claims infringed by the distributed only under the terms of this License making, using, or or a future version selling of Modifications made by that of this License released under Section 6.1, and Contributor either alone You must include a and/or in combination with its copy of this License with every copy of the Contributor Version (or portions Source Code You of such combination), to make, use, sell, distribute. You may not offer or impose any offer for sale, have terms on any Source Code made, and/or otherwise dispose of: 1) version that alters or restricts the applicable Modifications made by that version of this Contributor (or portions thereof); and 2) License or the recipients' rights hereunder. the combination of However, You may include Modifications made by that Contributor an additional document offering the additional with its Contributor rights described in Version (or portions of such Section 3.5. combination).
3.2. Availability of Source Code. (c) the licenses granted in Sections 2.2(a) Any Modification which You create or to which and 2.2(b) are You contribute must be effective on the date Contributor first made available in Source Code form under the makes Commercial Use of terms of this License the Covered Code. either on the same media as an Executable version or via an accepted (d) Notwithstanding Section 2.2(b) Electronic Distribution Mechanism to anyone to above, no patent license is whom you made an granted: 1) for any code that Contributor Executable version available; and if made has deleted from the available via Electronic Contributor Version; 2) separate from Distribution Mechanism, must remain available the Contributor Version; for at least twelve (12) 3) for infringements caused by: i) third months after the date it initially became party modifications of available, or at least six Contributor Version or ii) the (6) months after a subsequent version of that combination of Modifications made particular Modification
156 has been made available to such recipients. reasonably calculated to inform those You are responsible for who received the Covered ensuring that the Source Code version remains Code that new knowledge has been available even if the obtained. Electronic Distribution Mechanism is maintained by a third party. (b) Contributor APIs.
If Contributor's Modifications include an 3.3. Description of Modifications. application programming You must cause all Covered Code to which You interface and Contributor has knowledge contribute to contain a of patent licenses which file documenting the changes You made to are reasonably necessary to implement create that Covered Code and that API, Contributor must the date of any change. You must include a also include this information in the prominent statement that LEGAL file. the Modification is derived, directly or indirectly, from Original (c) Representations. Code provided by the Initial Developer and Contributor represents that, except as including the name of the disclosed pursuant to Initial Developer in (a) the Source Code, and (b) Section 3.4(a) above, Contributor in any notice in an believes that Contributor's Executable version or related documentation in Modifications are Contributor's original which You describe the creation(s) and/or origin or ownership of the Covered Code. Contributor has sufficient rights to grant the rights conveyed by 3.4. Intellectual Property Matters this License. (a) Third Party Claims. If Contributor has knowledge that a 3.5. Required Notices. license under a third party's You must duplicate the notice in Exhibit A in intellectual property rights is required to each file of the Source exercise the rights Code. If it is not possible to put such notice in granted by such Contributor under a particular Source Sections 2.1 or 2.2, Code file due to its structure, then You must Contributor must include a text file with include such notice in a the Source Code location (such as a relevant directory) where a distribution titled "LEGAL" which user would be likely describes the claim and the to look for such a notice. If You created one or party making the claim in sufficient detail more Modification(s) that a recipient will You may add your name as a Contributor to the know whom to contact. If Contributor notice described in obtains such knowledge after Exhibit A. You must also duplicate this License the Modification is made available as in any documentation described in Section 3.2, for the Source Code where You describe Contributor shall promptly modify the recipients' rights or ownership LEGAL file in all copies rights relating to Covered Code. You may Contributor makes available thereafter choose to offer, and to and shall take other steps charge a fee for, warranty, support, indemnity or (such as notifying appropriate mailing liability lists or newsgroups) obligations to one or more recipients of
157 Covered Code. However, You from this License are offered by You alone, not by the Initial may do so only on Your own behalf, and not on behalf of the Initial Developer or any Contributor. You hereby agree to indemnify the Developer or any Contributor. You must make it absolutely clear than Initial Developer and every Contributor for any liability incurred by any such warranty, support, indemnity or liability obligation is the Initial Developer or such Contributor as a result of any such offered by You alone, and You hereby agree to indemnify the Initial terms You offer. Developer and every Contributor for any liability incurred by the 3.7. Larger Works. Initial Developer or such Contributor as a result You may create a Larger Work by combining of warranty, Covered Code with other code support, indemnity or liability terms You offer. not governed by the terms of this License and distribute the Larger 3.6. Distribution of Executable Versions. Work as a single product. In such a case, You must make sure the You may distribute Covered Code in Executable form only if the requirements of this License are fulfilled for the Covered Code. requirements of Section 3.1-3.5 have been met for that Covered Code, and if You include a notice stating that the If it is impossible for You to comply with any of Source Code version of the terms of this the Covered Code is available under the terms License with respect to some or all of the of this License, Covered Code due to including a description of how and where You statute, judicial order, or regulation then You have fulfilled the must: (a) comply with obligations of Section 3.2. The notice must be the terms of this License to the maximum extent conspicuously included possible; and (b) in any notice in an Executable version, related describe the limitations and the code they documentation or affect. Such description collateral in which You describe recipients' must be included in the LEGAL file described in rights relating to the Section 3.4 and must Covered Code. You may distribute the be included with all distributions of the Source Executable version of Covered Code. Except to the Code or ownership rights under a license of extent prohibited by statute or regulation, such Your choice, which may description must be contain terms different from this License, sufficiently detailed for a recipient of ordinary provided that You are in skill to be able to compliance with the terms of this License and understand it. that the license for the
Executable version does not attempt to limit or This License applies to code to which the Initial alter the recipient's Developer has rights in the Source Code version from the rights attached the notice in Exhibit A and to related set forth in this Covered Code. License. If You distribute the Executable version under a different 6.1. New Versions. license You must make it absolutely clear that any terms which differ Netscape Communications Corporation ("Netscape") may publish revised
158 and/or new versions of the License from time to DEFECTS, MERCHANTABLE, FIT FOR A time. Each version PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGING. will be given a distinguishing version number. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE COVERED CODE
IS WITH YOU. SHOULD ANY COVERED CODE 6.2. Effect of New Versions. PROVE DEFECTIVE IN ANY RESPECT, Once Covered Code has been published under YOU (NOT THE INITIAL DEVELOPER OR ANY a particular version of the OTHER CONTRIBUTOR) ASSUME THE License, You may always continue to use it COST OF ANY NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR under the terms of that OR CORRECTION. THIS DISCLAIMER version. You may also choose to use such OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL Covered Code under the terms PART OF THIS LICENSE. NO USE OF of any subsequent version of the License ANY COVERED CODE IS AUTHORIZED published by Netscape. No one HEREUNDER EXCEPT UNDER THIS DISCLAIMER. other than Netscape has the right to modify the terms applicable to 8.1. This License and the rights granted Covered Code created under this License. hereunder will terminate
automatically if You fail to comply with terms 6.3. Derivative Works. herein and fail to cure If You create or use a modified version of this such breach within 30 days of becoming aware License (which you may of the breach. All only do in order to apply it to code which is not sublicenses to the Covered Code which are already Covered Code properly granted shall governed by this License), You must (a) rename survive any termination of this License. Your license so that Provisions which, by their the phrases "Mozilla", "MOZILLAPL", "MOZPL", nature, must remain in effect beyond the "Netscape", termination of this License "MPL", "NPL" or any confusingly similar phrase shall survive. do not appear in your
license (except to note that your license differs 8.2. If You initiate litigation by asserting a from this License) patent infringement and (b) otherwise make it clear that Your claim (excluding declatory judgment actions) version of the license against Initial Developer contains terms which differ from the Mozilla or a Contributor (the Initial Developer or Public License and Contributor against whom Netscape Public License. (Filling in the name of You file such action is referred to as the Initial "Participant") alleging that: Developer, Original Code or Contributor in the notice described in (a) such Participant's Contributor Version Exhibit A shall not of themselves be deemed to directly or indirectly be modifications of infringes any patent, then any and all rights this License.) granted by such
Participant to You under Sections 2.1 and/or 2.2 COVERED CODE IS PROVIDED UNDER THIS of this License LICENSE ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, shall, upon 60 days notice from Participant WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER terminate prospectively, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, unless if within 60 days after receipt of notice WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES THAT You either: (i) THE COVERED CODE IS FREE OF
159 agree in writing to pay Participant a mutually all end user license agreements (excluding agreeable reasonable distributors and resellers) royalty for Your past and future use of which have been validly granted by You or any Modifications made by such distributor hereunder Participant, or (ii) withdraw Your litigation claim prior to termination shall survive termination. with respect to
the Contributor Version against such UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO Participant. If within 60 days LEGAL THEORY, WHETHER TORT of notice, a reasonable royalty and payment (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), CONTRACT, OR arrangement are not OTHERWISE, SHALL YOU, THE INITIAL mutually agreed upon in writing by the parties DEVELOPER, ANY OTHER CONTRIBUTOR, OR or the litigation claim ANY DISTRIBUTOR OF COVERED CODE, is not withdrawn, the rights granted by OR ANY SUPPLIER OF ANY OF SUCH PARTIES, Participant to You under BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON FOR Sections 2.1 and/or 2.2 automatically terminate ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR at the expiration of CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY the 60 day notice period specified above. CHARACTER INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL, (b) any software, hardware, or device, other WORK STOPPAGE, COMPUTER FAILURE OR than such Participant's MALFUNCTION, OR ANY AND ALL OTHER Contributor Version, directly or indirectly COMMERCIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES, EVEN IF infringes any patent, then SUCH PARTY SHALL HAVE BEEN any rights granted to You by such Participant INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH under Sections 2.1(b) DAMAGES. THIS LIMITATION OF and 2.2(b) are revoked effective as of the date LIABILITY SHALL NOT APPLY TO LIABILITY FOR You first made, used, DEATH OR PERSONAL INJURY sold, distributed, or had made, Modifications RESULTING FROM SUCH PARTY'S made by that NEGLIGENCE TO THE EXTENT APPLICABLE LAW Participant. PROHIBITS SUCH LIMITATION. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE
EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL 8.3. If You assert a patent infringement claim OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO against Participant THIS EXCLUSION AND LIMITATION MAY NOT alleging that such Participant's Contributor APPLY TO YOU. Version directly or
indirectly infringes any patent where such claim is resolved (such as The Covered Code is a "commercial item," as that term is defined in by license or settlement) prior to the initiation of patent 48 C.F.R. 2.101 (Oct. 1995), consisting of "commercial computer infringement litigation, then the reasonable value of the licenses software" and "commercial computer software documentation," as such granted by such Participant under Sections 2.1 or 2.2 shall be taken terms are used in 48 C.F.R. 12.212 (Sept. 1995). Consistent with 48 into account in determining the amount or value of any payment or C.F.R. 12.212 and 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4 (June 1995), license. all U.S. Government End Users acquire Covered
Code with only those 8.4. In the event of termination under Sections rights set forth herein. 8.1 or 8.2 above,
160 liability. This License represents the complete agreement concerning subject Initial Developer may designate portions of the matter hereof. If any provision of this License is Covered Code as held to be "Multiple-Licensed". "Multiple-Licensed" unenforceable, such provision shall be means that the Initial reformed only to the extent Developer permits you to utilize portions of the necessary to make it enforceable. This License Covered Code under shall be governed by Your choice of the NPL or the alternative California law provisions (except to the extent licenses, if any, specified applicable law, if by the Initial Developer in the file described in any, provides otherwise), excluding its conflict- Exhibit A. of-law provisions.
With respect to disputes in which at least one EXHIBIT A -Mozilla Public License. party is a citizen of,
or an entity chartered or registered to do business in the United ``The contents of this file are subject to the Mozilla Public License States of America, any litigation relating to this License shall be Version 1.1 (the "License"); you may not use this file except in subject to the jurisdiction of the Federal Courts of the Northern compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at District of California, with venue lying in Santa Clara County, http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/ California, with the losing party responsible for costs, including Software distributed under the License is without limitation, court costs and reasonable distributed on an "AS IS" attorneys' fees and basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, expenses. The application of the United Nations either express or implied. See the Convention on License for the specific language governing Contracts for the International Sale of Goods is rights and limitations expressly excluded. under the License. Any law or regulation which provides that the language of a contract The Original Code is shall be construed against the drafter shall not ______. apply to this
License. The Initial Developer of the Original Code is ______. As between Initial Developer and the Portions created by ______Contributors, each party is are Copyright (C) ______responsible for claims and damages arising, ______. All Rights Reserved. directly or indirectly,
out of its utilization of rights under this License and You agree to Contributor(s): ______. work with Initial Developer and Contributors to distribute such responsibility on an equitable basis. Nothing Alternatively, the contents of this file may be herein is intended or used under the terms shall be deemed to constitute any admission of of the _____ license (the "[___] License"), in which case the
161 provisions of [______] License are applicable instead of those above. If you wish to allow use of your version of this file only under the terms of the [____] License and not to allow others to use your version of this file under the MPL, indicate your decision by deleting the provisions above and replace them with the notice and other provisions required by the [___] License. If you do not delete the provisions above, a recipient may use your version of this file under either the MPL or the [___] License."
[NOTE: The text of this Exhibit A may differ slightly from the text of the notices in the Source Code files of the Original Code. You should use the text of this Exhibit A rather than the text found in the Original Code Source Code for Your Modifications.]
23.6 Announcements
You can receive an announcement on new TV software available for download or other software related issues. To read these announcements… 1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK. 2 - Select Update Software > Announcements, and press OK. 3 - If there is an announcement, you can read it or select one of the announcements available. 4 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close the menu.
162 24 Please find out for yourself about the local rules on separate collection of batteries because correct disposal will help to prevent negative consequences Specifications for the environment and human health. 24.1 Environmental 24.2 Power European Energy Label Product specifications are subject to change without The European Energy Label informs you on the notice. For more specification details of this product, energy efficiency class of this product. The greener see www.philips.com/support the energy efficiency class of this product is, the lower the energy it consumes. Power On the label, you can find the energy efficiency class, • Mains power : AC 220-240V +/-10% the average power consumption of this product in use • Ambient temperature : 5°C to 35°C and the average energy consumption for 1 year. You • Power saving features : Eco mode, Picture mute (for can also find the power consumption values for this radio), Auto switch-off timer, Eco settings menu. product on the Philips website for your country For power consumption information, see at www.philips.com/TV chapter Product Fiche.
End of Use 24.3 Operating System Disposal of your old product and batteries Your product is designed and manufactured with high Android OS : quality materials and components, which can be Android Nougat 7 recycled and reused.
24.4 Reception
• Aerial input : 75 ohm coaxial (IEC75) When this crossed-out wheeled bin symbol is • Tuner bands : Hyperband, S-Channel, UHF, VHF attached to a product it means that the product is • DVB : DVB-T2, DVB-C (cable) QAM covered by the European Directive 2012/19/EU. • Analogue video playback : SECAM, PAL • Digital video playback : MPEG2 SD/HD (ISO/IEC 13818-2), MPEG4 SD/HD (ISO/IEC 14496-10), HEVC* • Digital audio playback (ISO/IEC 13818-3) • Satellite aerial input : 75 ohm F-type • Input frequency range : 950 to 2150MHz Please inform yourself about the local separate • Input level range : 25 to 65 dBm collection system for electrical and electronic • DVB-S/S2 QPSK, symbol rate 2 to 45M symbols, products. SCPC and MCPC Please act according to your local rules and do not • LNB : DiSEqC 1.0, 1 to 4 LNBs supported, Polarity dispose of your old products with your normal selection 14/18V, Band selection 22kHz, Tone burst household waste. Correct disposal of your old mode, LNB current 300mA max product helps to prevent potential negative * Only for DVB-T2, DVB-S2 consequences for the environment and human health. Your product contains batteries covered by the European Directive 2006/66/EC, which cannot be disposed with normal household waste.
163 24.5 • Satellite tuner Display Type 24.8 Diagonal screen size • 108 cm / 43 inch Sound • 126 cm / 50 inch • 139 cm / 55 inch • Output power (RMS) : 20W • 164 cm / 65 inch • Dolby Audio • DTS Premium Sound ™ Display resolution • 3840 x 2160 24.9 24.6 Multimedia
Display Input Resolution Connections • USB 2.0 / USB 3.0 Video formats • Ethernet LAN RJ-45 Resolution — Refresh rate • Wi-Fi 802.11a/b/g/n/ac (built-in) • BT2.1 with EDR & BT4.0 with BLE (* Your TV doesn't • 480i - 60 Hz support Bluetooth subwoofer and Bluetooth • 480p - 60 Hz speakers) • 576i - 50 Hz • 576p - 50 Hz Supported USB file systems • 720p - 50 Hz, 60 Hz • FAT 16, FAT 32, NTFS • 1080i - 50 Hz, 60 Hz Playback formats • 1080p - 24 Hz, 25 Hz, 30 Hz • Video Codecs : AVI, MKV, H264/MPEG-4 AVC, • 2160p - 24 Hz, 25 Hz, 30 Hz, 50 Hz, 60 Hz MPEG-1, MPEG-2, MPEG-4, WMV9/VC1, HEVC Computer formats • Audio Codecs : AAC, MP3, WAV, WMA (v2 up to v9.2), WMA-PRO (v9 and v10) Resolutions (amongst others) • Subtitles : • 640 x 480p - 60 Hz – Formats : SRT, SUB, TXT, SMI • 800 x 600p - 60 Hz – Character encodings : UTF-8, Central Europe and • 1024 x 768p - 60 Hz Eastern Europe (Windows-1250), Cyrillic • 1280 x 768p - 60 Hz (Windows-1251), Greek (Windows-1253), Turkish • 1360 x 765p - 60 Hz (Windows-1254), Western Europe (Windows-1252) • 1360 x 768p - 60 Hz • Image Codecs : JPEG • 1280 x 1024p - 60 Hz • Limitations : • 1920 x 1080p - 60 Hz – Maximum supported total bit rate for a media file is • 3840 x 2160p - 24 Hz, 25 Hz, 30 Hz, 50 Hz, 60 Hz 30Mbps. – Maximum supported video bit rate for a media file is 20Mbps. 24.7 – MPEG-4 AVC (H.264) is supported up to High Profile @ L5.1. Connectivity – H.265 (HEVC) is supported upto Main / Main 10 Profile up to Level 5.1 TV Side – VC-1 is supported up to Advanced Profile @ L3. • Common Interface slot: CI+/CAM Supported media server software (DMS) • USB 1 - USB 2.0 • You can use any DLNA V1.5 certified media server • USB 2 - USB 3.0 software (DMS class). • Headphones - Stereo mini-jack 3.5mm • You can use the Philips TV Remote app (iOS and • HDMI 1 in - ARC - MHL - Ultra HD - HDR Android) on mobile devices. • HDMI 2 in - ARC - Ultra HD - HDR Performance may vary, depending on the capabilities TV Bottom of the mobile device and the software used. • Audio out - Optical Toslink • Network LAN - RJ45 • YPbPr, L/R • HDMI 4 in - ARC • HDMI 3 in - ARC • Antenna (75 ohm)
164 25 • Check the network - Check the network connection. • Update software - Check available software Help and Support updates. 25.1 • User manual - Read the user manual for TV information. Register your TV • Troubleshooting - Find a solution for frequent ask questions. Register your TV and enjoy a range of benefits • Factory settings - Reset all settings to factory including full support (including downloads), settings. privileged access to information about new products, • Reinstall TV - Reinstall and redo the complete TV exclusive offers and discounts, the chance to win installation. prizes and even participate in special surveys about • Contact info - Show the telephone number or web new releases. address for your country or region. Go to www.philips.com/welcome 25.3 25.2 Troubleshooting Using Help Switch On and Remote Control This TV offers help on screen . The TV does not switch on Open Help • Disconnect the power cable from the power outlet. Press the key (blue) to open Help immediately. Wait for one minute then reconnect it. Help will open on the chapter that is most relevant to • Make sure that the power cable is securely what you are doing or what is selected on TV. To look connected. up topics alphabetically, press the colour Creaking sound at startup or switch off key Keywords . When you are switching the TV on, off or to standby, To read the Help as a book, select Book. you hear a creaking sound from the TV chassis. The You can also open Help in the Home menu or creaking sound is due to the normal expansion and TV menu. contraction of the TV as it cools and warms up. This does not affect performance. Before you execute the Help instructions, close Help. To close Help, press the colour key Close . TV does not respond to the remote control For some activities, like Text (Teletext), the colour The TV requires some time to start up. During this keys have specific functions and cannot open Help. time, the TV does not respond to the remote control or TV controls. This is normal behaviour. TV Help on your tablet, smartphone or computer If the TV continues to be unresponsive to the remote To carry out extended sequences of instructions more control, you can check if the remote control is working easily, you can download the TV Help in PDF format by means of a mobile phone camera. Put the phone to read on your smartphone, tablet or in camera mode and point the remote control to the computer. Alternatively, you can print the relevant camera lens. If you press any key on the remote Help page from your computer. control and you notice the infra red LED flicker To download the Help (user manual) go through the camera, the remote control is working. to www.philips.com/support The TV needs to be checked. If you do not notice the flickering, the remote control might be broken or its batteries are low. (TV menu) > Help This method of checking the remote control is not possible with remote controls which are wirelessly You can use more Help functions to diagnose and get paired with the TV. more information about your TV. The TV goes back to standby after showing the • How to - You can see instructions on how to install channels, sort channels, update TV software, Philips startup screen connect external devices and use Smart functions on When the TV is in standby, a Philips startup screen is your TV. displayed, then the TV returns to standby mode. This is normal behaviour. When the TV is disconnected • Check the TV - You can check if the picture, sound, and reconnected to the power supply, the startup Ambilight are working fine. screen is displayed at the next startup. To switch on
165 the TV from standby, press on the remote control Picture position is incorrect or on the TV. Picture signals from some devices may not fit the The standby light keeps on blinking screen correctly. Check the signal output of the connected device. Disconnect the power cable from the power outlet. Wait 5 minutes before you reconnect the power Computer picture is not stable cable. If the blinking reoccurs, contact Philips TV Consumer Care. Make sure that your PC uses the supported resolution and refresh rate.
Channels Sound No digital channels found during the installation No sound or poor sound quality See the technical specifications to make sure that your TV supports DVB-T or DVB-C in your country. If no audio signal is detected, the TV automatically Make sure that all cables are properly connected and switches the audio output off — this does not indicate that the correct network is selected. malfunction. Previously installed channels are not in the channel • Make sure that the sound settings are correctly set. • Make sure that all cables are properly connected. list • Make sure that the volume is not muted or set to Make sure that the correct channel list is selected. zero. • Make sure that the TV audio output is connected to the audio input on the Home Theatre System. Sound should be heard from the HTS speakers. Picture • Some devices may require you to manually enable HDMI audio output. If HDMI audio is already enabled, No picture / distorted picture but you still do not hear audio, try changing the digital • Make sure that the antenna is properly connected to audio format of the device to PCM (Pulse Code the TV. Modulation). Refer to the documentation • Make sure that the correct device is selected as the accompanying your device for instructions. display source. • Make sure that the external device or source is properly connected. Sound but no picture HDMI and USB • Make sure that the picture settings are set correctly. HDMI Poor antenna reception • Note that HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content • Make sure that the antenna is properly connected to Protection) support can delay the time taken for a TV the TV. to display content from an HDMI device. • Loud speakers, unearthed audio devices, neon • If the TV does not recognise the HDMI device and lights, high buildings and other large objects can no picture is displayed, switch the source from one influence reception quality. If possible, try to improve device to another and back again. the reception quality by changing the antenna • If the picture and sound of a device connected direction or moving devices away from the TV. to HDMI 3 or HDMI 4 is distorted, connect the • If reception on only one channel is poor, fine-tune device to HDMI 1 or HDMI 2 on this TV. this channel with Manual Installation. • If the picture and sound of a device connected with Poor picture from a device HDMI is distorted, check if a different HDMI Ultra • Make sure that the device is connected properly. HD setting can solve this problem. In Help, press the • Make sure that the picture settings are set correctly. colour key Keywords and look up HDMI Ultra Picture settings change after a while HD. Make sure that Location is set to Home . You can • If there are intermittent sound disruptions, make change and save settings in this mode. sure that output settings from the HDMI device are correct. A commercial banner appears • If you use an HDMI-to-DVI adapter or HDMI-to-DVI cable, make sure that an additional audio cable is Make sure that Location is set to Home. connected to AUDIO IN (mini-jack only), if available. Picture does not fit the screen HDMI EasyLink does not work Change to a different picture format. • Make sure that your HDMI devices are HDMI-CEC compatible. EasyLink features only work with devices
166 that are HDMI-CEC compatible. Wrong Menu Language No volume icon shown • When an HDMI-CEC audio device is connected and Wrong menu language you use the TV Remote Control to adjust the volume level from the device, this behaviour is normal. Change the language back to your language. Photos, videos and music from a USB device do not 1 - Press (the round key above the OK key). show 2 - Select the icon (Settings) and press OK. • Make sure that the USB storage device is set to Mass 3 - Press 5 times (down). Storage Class compliant, as described in the storage 4 - Press 3 times (right), select your language and device's documentation. press OK. • Make sure that the USB storage device is compatible 5 - Press BACK to close the menu. with the TV. • Make sure that the audio and picture file formats are supported by the TV. 25.4 Choppy playback of USB files • The transfer performance of the USB storage device Online Help may limit the data transfer rate to the TV which To solve any Philips TV related problem, you can causes poor playback. consult our online support. You can select your language and enter your product model number. Wi-Fi, Internet and Bluetooth Go to www.philips.com/support . On the support site you can find your country's Wi-Fi network not found or distorted telephone number to contact us as well as answers to • Microwave ovens, DECT phones or other Wi-Fi frequently asked questions (FAQs). In some countries, 802.11b/g/n devices in your proximity might disturb you can chat with one of our collaborators and ask the wireless network. your question directly or send a question by email. • Make sure that the firewalls in your network allow You can download new TV software or the manual to access to the TV's wireless connection. read on your computer. • If the wireless network does not work properly in your home, try the wired network installation. Internet does not work 25.5 • If the connection to the router is OK, check the Support and Repair router connection to the Internet. The PC and Internet connection are slow For support and repair, call the Consumer Care • Look in your wireless router's user manual for hotline in your country. Our service engineers will take information on indoor range, transfer rate and other care of a repair, if necessary. factors of signal quality. Find the telephone number in the printed • Use a high-speed (broadband) Internet connection documentation that came with the TV. for your router. Or consult our DHCP website www.philips.com/support and select your • If the connection fails, you can check the DHCP country if needed. (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) setting of the router. DHCP should be switched on. TV model number and serial number Bluetooth lost connection You might be asked to provide the TV product model • Position the wireless speaker within a range of 5 number and serial number. Find these numbers on meters from the TV. the packaging label or on the type label on the back • Places with a high amount of wireless activity - or bottom of the TV. apartments with lots of wireless routers - can hamper the wireless connection. Keep the router and wireless Warning speaker as close to the TV as possible. Do not attemp to repair the TV yourself. This may Bluetooth Audio and Video syncronisation cause severe injury, irrepairable damage to your TV or • Before you purchase a wireless Bluetooth speaker, void your warranty. inform yourself about its quality of Audio to Video syncronisation, commonly called 'lip sync'. Not all Bluetooth devices perform correctly. Ask your dealer for advice.
167 26 ensure that the power voltage matches the value printed on the back of the TV. Never connect the TV Safety and Care to the power outlet if the voltage is different.
26.1 Safety Risk of Injury to Children Follow these precautions to prevent the TV from Important toppling over and causing injury to children: • Never place the TV on a surface covered by a cloth Read and understand all safety instructions before or other material that can be pulled away. you use the TV. If damage is caused by failure to • Ensure that no part of the TV hangs over the edge of follow instructions, the warranty does not apply. the mounting surface. • Never place the TV on tall furniture, such as a bookcase, without anchoring both the furniture and Risk of Electric Shock or Fire TV to the wall or a suitable support. • Teach children about the dangers of climbing on • Never expose the TV to rain or water. Never place furniture to reach the TV. liquid containers, such as vases, near the TV. Risk of swallowing batteries ! If liquids are spilt on or into the TV, disconnect the TV from the power outlet immediately. The remote control may contain coin-type batteries Contact Philips TV Consumer Care to have the TV which can easily be swallowed by small children. checked before use. Keep these batteries out of reach of children at all • Never expose the TV, remote control or batteries to times. excessive heat. Never place them near burning candles, naked flames or other heat sources, including direct sunlight. Risk of Overheating • Never insert objects into the ventilation slots or other openings on the TV. Never install the TV in a confined space. Always leave • Never place heavy objects on the power cord. a space of at least 10 cm or 4 inches around the TV • Avoid force coming onto power plugs. Loose power for ventilation. Ensure curtains or other objects never plugs can cause arcing or fire. Ensure that no strain is cover the ventilation slots on the TV. exerted on the power cord when you swivel the TV screen. • To disconnect the TV from the mains power, the power plug of the TV must be disconnected. When Lightning Storms disconnecting the power, always pull the power plug, Disconnect the TV from the power outlet and antenna never the cord. Ensure that you have full access to before lightning storms. the power plug, power cord and outlet socket at all During lightning storms, never touch any part of the times. TV, power cord or antenna cable.
Risk of Injury or Damage to the TV Risk of Hearing Damage • Two people are required to lift and carry a TV that Avoid using earphones or headphones at high weighs more than 25 kg or 55 lbs. volumes or for prolonged periods of time. • If you mount the TV on a stand, only use the supplied stand. Secure the stand to the TV tightly. Place the TV on a flat, level surface that can support the weight of the TV and the stand. Low Temperatures • When wall mounted, ensure that the wall mount can safely bear the weight of the TV set. TP Vision bears If the TV is transported in temperatures below 5°C or no responsibility for improper wall mounting that 41°F, unpack the TV and wait until the TV temperature results in accident, injury or damage. reaches room temperature before connecting the TV • Parts of this product are made of glass. Handle with to the power outlet. care to avoid injury or damage. Risk of damage to the TV ! Before you connect the TV to the power outlet,
168 Humidity
In rare occasions, depending on temperature and humidity, minor condensation can occur on the inside of the TV glass front (on some models). To prevent this, do not expose the TV to direct sunlight, heat or extreme humidity. If condensation occurs, it will disappear spontaneously while the TV is playing for a few hours. The condensation moisture will not harm the TV or cause malfunction.
26.2 Screen Care
• Never touch, push, rub or strike the screen with any object. • Unplug the TV before cleaning. • Clean the TV and frame with a soft damp cloth and wipe gently. Avoid touching the Ambilight LEDs on the backside of the TV. Never use substances such as alcohol, chemicals or household cleaners on the TV. • To avoid deformations and colour fading, wipe off water drops as quickly as possible. • Avoid stationary images as much as possible. Stationary images are images that remain onscreen for extended periods of time. Stationary images include onscreen menus, black bars, time displays, etc. If you must use stationary images, reduce screen contrast and brightness to avoid screen damage.
169 27 black dots or bright points of light (red, green or blue) may appear constantly on the screen. This is a structural property of the display (within common Terms of Use industry standards) and is not a malfunction. 27.1 CE compliance Hereby, TP Vision Europe B.V. declares that this Terms of Use - TV television is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of 2018 © TP Vision Europe B.V. All rights reserved. Directives 2014/53/EU (RED), 2009/125/EC (Eco This product was brought to the market by TP Vision Design) and 2011/65/EC (RoHS). Europe B.V. or one of its affiliates, hereinafter referred Compliance with EMF to as TP Vision, which is the manufacturer of the TP Vision manufactures and sells many products product. TP Vision is the warrantor in relation to the targeted at consumers which, like any electronic TV with which this booklet was packaged. Philips and apparatus, in general have the ability to emit and the Philips Shield Emblem are registered trademarks receive electromagnetic signals. One of TP Vision’s of Koninklijke Philips N.V. leading business principles is to take all necessary Specifications are subject to change without notice. health and safety measures for our products, to Trademarks are the property of Koninklijke Philips N.V comply with all applicable legal requirements and to or their respective owners. TP Vision reserves the right stay well within the Electro Magnetic Field (EMF) to change products at any time without being obliged standards applicable at the time of producing the to adjust earlier supplies accordingly. products. The written material packaged with the TV and the TP Vision is committed to developing, producing and manual stored in the memory of the TV or marketing products that cause no adverse health downloaded from the Philips effects. TP Vision confirms that, as long as its products website www.philips.com/support are believed to are handled properly for their intended use, they are be adequate for the intended use of the system. safe to use according to scientific evidence available today. TP Vision plays an active role in the The material in this manual is believed adequate for development of international EMF and safety the intended use of the system. If the product, or its standards, enabling TP Vision to anticipate further individual modules or procedures, are used for developments in standardisation for early integration purposes other than those specified herein, in its products. confirmation of their validity and suitability must be obtained. TP Vision warrants that the material itself does not infringe any United States patents. No 27.2 further warranty is expressed or implied. TP Vision cannot be held responsible neither for any errors in Terms of Use - Smart TV the content of this document nor for any problems as a result of the content in this document. Errors You can see the terms of use, privacy policy, and also reported to Philips will be adapted and published on set privacy settings of your Smart TV. the Philips support website as soon as possible. To open the terms of use of Smart TV page… Terms of warranty - Risk of injury, damage to TV or 1 - Press HOME to open the Home menu. void of warranty! 2 - Select Apps to open Apps. Never attempt to repair the TV yourself. Use the TV and accessories only as intended by the manufacturer. The caution sign printed on the back of 27.3 the TV indicates risk of electric shock. Never remove the TV cover. Always contact Philips TV Customer Terms of Use - Philips App Care for service or repairs. Find the telephone number in the printed documentation that came with the Gallery TV. Or consult our website www.philips.com/support and select your In Help, press the colour key Keywords and look country if needed. Any operation expressly prohibited up Terms of Use, App Gallery for more information. in this manual, or any adjustments and assembly procedures not recommended or authorised in this manual, shall void the warranty. Pixel characteristics This TV product has a high number of colour pixels. Although it has effective pixels of 99.999% or more,
170 28 28.4 Copyrights Dolby Audio Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. 28.1 Dolby, Dolby Audio, and the double-D symbol are MHL trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
MHL MHL, Mobile High-Definition Link and the MHL Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of the MHL, LLC.
28.5 DTS Premium Sound ™
DTS Premium Sound ™ For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. 28.2 Manufactured under license from DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, the Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol Ultra HD together are registered trademarks, and DTS Premium Sound is a trademark of DTS, Inc. © DTS, Inc. All Ultra HD Rights Reserved. The DIGITALEUROPE UHD Display Logo is a trademark of DIGITALEUROPE.
28.6 28.3 DTS 2.0+Digital Out ™
HDMI DTS 2.0+Digital Out ™ HDMI For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under license from DTS Licensing The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Limited. DTS, the Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are together are registered trademarks, and DTS trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI 2.0+Digital Out is a trademark of DTS, Inc. © DTS, Inc. Licensing LLC in the United States and other All Rights Reserved. countries.
171 28.7 Microsoft
Windows Media Windows Media is either a registered trademark or 28.10 trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Other Trademarks
All other registered and unregistered trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Microsoft PlayReady Content owners use Microsoft PlayReady™ content access technology to protect their intellectual property, including copyrighted content. This device uses PlayReady technology to access PlayReady-protected content and/or WMDRM- protected content. If the device fails to properly enforce restrictions on content usage, content owners may require Microsoft to revoke the device's ability to consume PlayReady-protected content. Revocation should not affect unprotected content or content protected by other content access technologies. Content owners may require you to upgrade PlayReady to access their content. If you decline an upgrade, you will not be able to access content that requires the upgrade.
28.8 Wi-Fi Alliance
Wi-Fi Wi-Fi®, the Wi-Fi CERTIFIED logo, the Wi-Fi logo are registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
28.9 Kensington
Kensington (If applicable) Kensington and Micro Saver are registered US trademarks of ACCO World Corporation with issued registrations and pending applications in other countries throughout the world.
172 29 Disclaimer regarding services and/or software offered by third parties
Services and/or software offered by third parties may be changed, suspended, or terminated without prior notice. TP Vision does not bear any responsibility in these sorts of situations.
173 Index
A D Age Rating 10 Digital Text 13 Ambilight+hue, configuration 52 Disposal of TV or batteries 163 Ambilight+hue, Immersion 52 DVB (Digital Video Broadcast) 20 Ambilight+hue, on or off 52 DVD player 27 Ambilight, Ambilight Style 69 Ambilight, Settings 51 E Android Settings 35 EasyLink HDMI CEC 54 Announcements 162 Eco Settings 52 Antenna connection 5 End of use 163 Antenna, Manual Installation 21 European Ecolabel 163 APP lock 39 F Apps 37 Frequency Scan 20 Audio Language 11 Frequency Step Size 20 Audio Language, Primary 11 Audio Language, Secondary 11 G Auto Volume Levelling 50 Game Console, connect 28 Automatic Channel Update 19 Gaming 68 B Google Play Store 38 Blu-ray Disc player, connect 27 H Bluetooth 27 Hard of hearing 56 Bluetooth, Devices 27 HbbTV 14 Bluetooth, Pairing 28 HDMI MHL 24 Bluetooth, Remove device 28 HDMI Ultra HD 54 Bluetooth, Select device 28 HDMI, ARC 24 C HDR programmes 47 HDR upscaling 47 Cable, Manual Installation 21 Headphones, connect 28 CAM, Conditional Access Module 25 Home Menu 72 Camcorder, connect 32 Home Theatre System, problems 26 Channel 10 Hue Bridge 52 Channel List Copy 21 Hue Bulbs 52 Channel List Copy, copy 21 Channel List Copy, current version 22 I Channel List Copy, upload 22 Interactive TV 14 Channel logos 54 Interactive TV, about 14 Channel Update Message 19 Internet memory, clear 34 Channel, age rating 10 Channel, Antenna Installation 19 I Channel, Automatic Channel Update 19 iTV 14 Channel, Cable Installation 19 Channel, Manual channel update 19 K Channel, Options 10 Keys on TV 9 Channel, Reinstall 19 M Channel, Satellite Installation 16 Media 58 Channel, switch to a channel 10 Media files, from a computer or NAS 58 Channel, TV guide 62 Media files, from a USB drive 58 Child Lock 57 MPEG Artefact Reduction 48 Child Lock, App Lock 57 CI+ 25 N Colour, colour control 47 Network Frequency 20 Colour, Colour enhancement 46 Network Frequency Mode 20 Common Interface Slot 25 Network Installation 33 Computer, connect 32 Network, connect 33 Connect, USB Flash Drive 31 Network, settings 34 Connectivity Guide 24 Network, Wired 34 Consumer Care 167 Network, WPS with PIN code 33 Contact Philips 167 Now on TV 70 Contrast, Contrast Mode 47 Contrast, Dynamic Contrast 48 O On and Off 9
174 Online support 167 Troubleshooting 165 Open Source software 75 TV Guide 62 Options on a Channel 10 TV Guide, data and information 62 TV Guide, Reminder 62 P TV Installation 19 Parental Rating 10 TV network name 34 Partially sighted 56 TV on Demand 70 Pause TV 64 TV placement 4 Photo camera, connect 31 Photos, Videos and Music 58 U Picture Style 46 Unicable 17 Picture, HDR upscaling 47 Universal Access 56 Picture, picture format 49 USB Hard Drive, disk space 29 Picture, quick settings 49 USB Hard Drive, Installation 29 Power connection 4 USB Keyboard 30 Power consumption check 52 USB Keyboard, connect 30 Problems, Channels 166 Problems, Connection, Internet 167 V Problems, Connection, Wi-Fi 167 Video on Demand 71 Problems, HDMI Connection 166 Viewing data 55 Problems, Menu language 167 Viewing distance 4 Problems, Picture 166 W Problems, Remote control 165 Watch TV 10 Problems, Sound 166 Wi-Fi 33 Problems, USB Connection 166 Wired Network 34 Product Fiche 163 Wireless Network 33 Programmes, Recommendations 70 R Reception Quality 20 Recording 64 Recording, TV Guide data 62 Register your product 165 Reinstall TV 19 Repair 167 S Safety Instructions 168 Satellite CAMs 16 Satellite Installation 16 Satellite, Add Satellite 17 Satellite, Channel packages 17 Satellite, Manual Channel Update 17 Satellite, Manual Installation 18 Satellite, Remove Satellite 18 Satellite, Unicable 17 Screen care 169 Sharpness, MPEG Artefact Reduction 48 Smart Card, CAM 25 Software, Update 74 Sound Style 49 Sound, Auto Volume Levelling 50 Standby 9 Subtitle 11 Subtitle Language 11 Subtitle Language, Primary 11 Subtitle Language, Secondary 11 Support, online 167 Switching On 9 T Teletext 13 Terms of Use 170 Terms of Use, App Gallery 35 Test Reception 20 Text 13 Text language, Primary 14 Text language, Secondary 14
175 176
Powered by TCPDF (www.tcpdf.org)